bluetooth controlled folk lifter
-
Upload
mukul-mohal -
Category
Engineering
-
view
230 -
download
3
Transcript of bluetooth controlled folk lifter
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS`
CONTENTS
PAGE NO
COVER PAGE i
TITLE PAGE ii
CONTENTS iii
CERTIFICATE iv
ACKNOWLEDGMENT v
DECLARATION vi
DECLARATION vii
LIST OF FIGURES vii
LIST OF TABLES ix
CHAPTER-1 INTRODUCTION TO ―MINOR PROJECT
11 What Is A Fork Lifter 1
111 Stability 2
112 Fulcrum Point 2
113 Center Of Gravity (Cg) 3
12 Block Diagram Of Bluetooth Control Folk Lifter Car 4
13 Pic16f887 Microcontroller 5
131 Microcontroller Versus Microprocessor 5 132 Features of Pic 16f887 Microcontrollers 6
133 Inside A Pic Microcontroller 9
2
134 Program Memory 9
135 Data Memory (Ram) 10
136 Bus 10
137 IO Unit 10
138 Ports 10
14 Component Used 11
15 Hc-05 Bluetooth Module Bluetooth 11
151 Setting Up Connections 12
152 Pairing and Bonding 13
153 Implementation 13
154 Pairing Mechanisms 14
155 Notifications 17
156 Description of Command 19
16 L293d H Bridge 20
17 Lm 7805 Voltage Regulator 22
171 Description 22
18 Capacitor 25
181 Function 25
182 Polarised Capacitors (Large Values 1microf +) 26
183 Electrolytic Capacitors 26
3
19 Diodes 27
191 Function 27
192 Forward Voltage Drop 27
193 Reverse Voltage 27
194 Connecting and Soldering 28
110 Resistor 28
1101 Function 29
1102 Resistor Shorthand 29
111 Zener Diode 29
112 Dc Gear Motor 31
1121 External Structure 31
1122 Rear View 33
1123 How Geared Dc Motor Works 33
113 Variable Resistors 37
1131construction 37
1132 Linear (Lin) and Logarithmic (Log) Tracks 38
1133 Potentiometer 39
CHAPTER 2
21 Overview 40
22 Creating A Circuit Design Using Capture 41
4
23 Using Component To Make Schematics 43
24 Connecting Two Components By Wire Connection 45
25 Creating The Netlist 47
26 Designing The Pcb With Layout Plus 49
27 Opening Layout Plus 50
28 Converting Connections Into Tracks 54
29 Broad Outline 55
210 Power Supply For Folk Lifter Car 57
2101 Connectors of A Battery 58
CHAPTER-3 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 Results 60
32 Discussion 60
CHAPTER-4 CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 Conclusion 62
42 Future Scope of Embedded System 63
421 Opportunities 65
5
LIST OF FIGURES
Name of Figure
Page No
Fig 11 folk lifter car 2
Fig 12 fulcrum point 2
Fig 13 center of gravity 3
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car 4
Fig 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor 6
Fig 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers 9
Fig 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module 16
Fig 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller 17
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC 20
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor 21
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator 22
Fig 112 LM 7805 23
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor 26
Fig 114 diodes 27
Fig 115 diode terminal 28
6
Fig 116 color coded register 29
Fig 117 gear dc motor 32
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure 32
Fig119 geared head 33
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view 33
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure 34
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear 34
Fig123 gear dc motor 34
Fig124 gear dc motor gear 35
Fig125 gear dc motor in working 36
Fig 126 variable resistor 37
Fig 127 rheostate symbol 38
Fig128 potentiometer symbol 39
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout 41
Fig 22 New project dialog 42
Fig 23 Powersupplydsn file 42
Fig 24 Place part dialog 44
Fig 25 GND 44
Fig 26 Placing components 45
Fig 27 Connecting components using wire 46
Fig 28 Display properties of the component 46
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 47
Fig 210 Left click power supplydsn 48
7
Fig 211 Create Netlist option 48
Fig 212 Create Netlist tab 49
Fig 213 Netlist created 49
Fig 214 Creating new layout 50
Fig 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design 51
Fig 216 After all footprints are selected 52
Fig 217 Display DRC 52
Fig 218 Edit component 53
Fig 219 Designing circuit 53
Fig 220 Edit segment mode 54
Fig 221 Selecting layer for tracks 54
Fig 222 Converting connection to tracks 55
Fig 223 Selecting obstacle tool 55
Fig 224 Selecting obstacle new 56
Fig 225 Drawing board outline on global layer 56
Fig 226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 57
Fig 227 9 volt battery 58
Fig 228 Battery cap 58
8
CHAPTER-1
INTRODUCTION TO ldquoMINOR PROJECTrdquo
Our project is based on microcontroller in which we have used several steps for
making our project so here we are giving introduction to all the component which we
have used in our project work This project is a Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
For this the android mobile user has to install an application on herhis mobile Then
user needs to turn on the Bluetooth in the mobile The wireless communication
techniques used to control the robot is Bluetooth technology User can use various
commands like move forward reverse stop move left move right These commands
are sent from the Android mobile to the Bluetooth receiver Android based folk lifter
car has a Bluetooth receiver unit which receives the commands and give it to the
microcontroller circuit to control the motors The microcontroller then transmits the
signal to the motor driver IClsquos to operate the motors
11 WHAT IS A FORK LIFTER
A forklift is one type of power industrial truck that comes in different shapes
sizes and forms A forklift can be called a pallet truck rider truck fork truck
or lift truck Yet the ultimate purpose of a forklift is the same to safely allow
one person to lift and move large heavy loads with little effort For the purposes
of this training a forklift is a small or large A forklift operator should be aware
of the multiple parts on a forklift (see diagram below) in order to safely operate
the forklift and be able to detect when an unsafe vehicle needs to be removed
from service industrial truck with a power-operated pronged platform(commonly
known as forks)
9
Fig 11 folk lifter car
111 STABILITY
Forklift stability is an important topic because the leading cause of death and serious
injury involving forklifts stems from overturns caused by forklift instability Forklift
stability can be described by four elements the fulcrum point center of gravity the
stability triangle and the load center
112 FULCRUM POINT
The fulcrum point may sound complicated but think of it this way As children we all
played on seesaws which have a board that is balanced in the riddle by a support
piece This support piece is what is called the fulcrum point On a fork lifterthe
fulcrum point is the front wheels The fulcrum point serves as a support piece to
balance the load and counterweight The illustration at the right displays this concept
Fig 12 fulcrum point
10
113 CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
In addition to balancing both ends of the fork lifter we must also balance in all
directions Balancing in all directions is better known as the center of gravity The
center of gravity is that point where all parts of a load or truck are balanced in all
directions and will remain at rest As a driver it is important to remember that anew
center of gravity is created when youre handling a load (as opposed to an empty
load) one that combines both the loads and the truckt cenrer of gravityThink of it like
riding a tricycle If you peddle a tricycle around a corner and shift the center of
gravity forward over the narrowest part of the tricycle you are likely to turn over
But if you shift your weight on the rear and place the center of gravity over the
widest part of the tricycle you are less likely to tip over
Fig 13 center of gravity
Some factors that could cause instability are
Carrying the load too high
Excessively tilting the load forward
Operating on a decline
Heavy braking
Inappropriate use of forklift attachments
11
Off-center loads
uneven terrain
Quick turns
However your potential to turn over can be reduced if you follow a few safety rules
Make sure the load is stable and safely arranged on the forklift
Do not tilt the forks forward except when picking up or depositing a load
Keep the load low just above the pavement with the forks tilted back when traveling
Enter tractor-trailers or elevators squarely when picking up or depositing loads
Drive at a slow enough speed to allow you to stop safely
Drive slowly on wet or slippery surfaces
Avoid driving on unstable surfaces or where there are loose objects on the surface
12 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BLUETOOTH CONTROL FOLK
LIFTER CAR
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car
12
13 PIC16F887 MICROCONTROLLER
PIC stands for ―Peripheral Interface Controller It is having 16 bit CPU amp introduced
by ―Microchip company It is RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
compatible controller This controller has only 35 instructions Its maximum operated
speed is 20 MHz oscillatorclock input The nice things about the controller is that
they are compatible with each other and a program for one model can very easily be
used in many cases with no modification be run on other models of family The basic
assembler instruction set of PIC microcontroller consist of only 35 instructions and
most of family members (except the newly developed devices) use same instruction
set ie why a program developed for one model can run on another model with
same architecture without any changes The PIC microcontroller has INTRRUPT
capability
131 MICROCONTROLLER VERSUS MICROPROCESSOR
A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in many ways The
first and most important difference is its functionality In order the microprocessor
may be used other components such as memory or components for data transfer must
be added to it Even though the microprocessor is considered to be a powerful
computer machine the weak point is that it is not adjusted to communication to
peripheral environment Simply in order to communicate with peripheral
environment the microprocessor must use specialized circuits added as external
chips It means in short that microprocessors are the pure heart of the computers That
is how it was when they appeared and the same is now On the other hand the
microcontroller is designed to be all of that in one No other specialized external
components are needed for its application because all necessary circuits which
otherwise belong to peripherals are already built into it It in any case saves the time
and space needed to design a device
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
2
134 Program Memory 9
135 Data Memory (Ram) 10
136 Bus 10
137 IO Unit 10
138 Ports 10
14 Component Used 11
15 Hc-05 Bluetooth Module Bluetooth 11
151 Setting Up Connections 12
152 Pairing and Bonding 13
153 Implementation 13
154 Pairing Mechanisms 14
155 Notifications 17
156 Description of Command 19
16 L293d H Bridge 20
17 Lm 7805 Voltage Regulator 22
171 Description 22
18 Capacitor 25
181 Function 25
182 Polarised Capacitors (Large Values 1microf +) 26
183 Electrolytic Capacitors 26
3
19 Diodes 27
191 Function 27
192 Forward Voltage Drop 27
193 Reverse Voltage 27
194 Connecting and Soldering 28
110 Resistor 28
1101 Function 29
1102 Resistor Shorthand 29
111 Zener Diode 29
112 Dc Gear Motor 31
1121 External Structure 31
1122 Rear View 33
1123 How Geared Dc Motor Works 33
113 Variable Resistors 37
1131construction 37
1132 Linear (Lin) and Logarithmic (Log) Tracks 38
1133 Potentiometer 39
CHAPTER 2
21 Overview 40
22 Creating A Circuit Design Using Capture 41
4
23 Using Component To Make Schematics 43
24 Connecting Two Components By Wire Connection 45
25 Creating The Netlist 47
26 Designing The Pcb With Layout Plus 49
27 Opening Layout Plus 50
28 Converting Connections Into Tracks 54
29 Broad Outline 55
210 Power Supply For Folk Lifter Car 57
2101 Connectors of A Battery 58
CHAPTER-3 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 Results 60
32 Discussion 60
CHAPTER-4 CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 Conclusion 62
42 Future Scope of Embedded System 63
421 Opportunities 65
5
LIST OF FIGURES
Name of Figure
Page No
Fig 11 folk lifter car 2
Fig 12 fulcrum point 2
Fig 13 center of gravity 3
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car 4
Fig 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor 6
Fig 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers 9
Fig 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module 16
Fig 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller 17
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC 20
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor 21
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator 22
Fig 112 LM 7805 23
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor 26
Fig 114 diodes 27
Fig 115 diode terminal 28
6
Fig 116 color coded register 29
Fig 117 gear dc motor 32
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure 32
Fig119 geared head 33
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view 33
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure 34
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear 34
Fig123 gear dc motor 34
Fig124 gear dc motor gear 35
Fig125 gear dc motor in working 36
Fig 126 variable resistor 37
Fig 127 rheostate symbol 38
Fig128 potentiometer symbol 39
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout 41
Fig 22 New project dialog 42
Fig 23 Powersupplydsn file 42
Fig 24 Place part dialog 44
Fig 25 GND 44
Fig 26 Placing components 45
Fig 27 Connecting components using wire 46
Fig 28 Display properties of the component 46
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 47
Fig 210 Left click power supplydsn 48
7
Fig 211 Create Netlist option 48
Fig 212 Create Netlist tab 49
Fig 213 Netlist created 49
Fig 214 Creating new layout 50
Fig 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design 51
Fig 216 After all footprints are selected 52
Fig 217 Display DRC 52
Fig 218 Edit component 53
Fig 219 Designing circuit 53
Fig 220 Edit segment mode 54
Fig 221 Selecting layer for tracks 54
Fig 222 Converting connection to tracks 55
Fig 223 Selecting obstacle tool 55
Fig 224 Selecting obstacle new 56
Fig 225 Drawing board outline on global layer 56
Fig 226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 57
Fig 227 9 volt battery 58
Fig 228 Battery cap 58
8
CHAPTER-1
INTRODUCTION TO ldquoMINOR PROJECTrdquo
Our project is based on microcontroller in which we have used several steps for
making our project so here we are giving introduction to all the component which we
have used in our project work This project is a Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
For this the android mobile user has to install an application on herhis mobile Then
user needs to turn on the Bluetooth in the mobile The wireless communication
techniques used to control the robot is Bluetooth technology User can use various
commands like move forward reverse stop move left move right These commands
are sent from the Android mobile to the Bluetooth receiver Android based folk lifter
car has a Bluetooth receiver unit which receives the commands and give it to the
microcontroller circuit to control the motors The microcontroller then transmits the
signal to the motor driver IClsquos to operate the motors
11 WHAT IS A FORK LIFTER
A forklift is one type of power industrial truck that comes in different shapes
sizes and forms A forklift can be called a pallet truck rider truck fork truck
or lift truck Yet the ultimate purpose of a forklift is the same to safely allow
one person to lift and move large heavy loads with little effort For the purposes
of this training a forklift is a small or large A forklift operator should be aware
of the multiple parts on a forklift (see diagram below) in order to safely operate
the forklift and be able to detect when an unsafe vehicle needs to be removed
from service industrial truck with a power-operated pronged platform(commonly
known as forks)
9
Fig 11 folk lifter car
111 STABILITY
Forklift stability is an important topic because the leading cause of death and serious
injury involving forklifts stems from overturns caused by forklift instability Forklift
stability can be described by four elements the fulcrum point center of gravity the
stability triangle and the load center
112 FULCRUM POINT
The fulcrum point may sound complicated but think of it this way As children we all
played on seesaws which have a board that is balanced in the riddle by a support
piece This support piece is what is called the fulcrum point On a fork lifterthe
fulcrum point is the front wheels The fulcrum point serves as a support piece to
balance the load and counterweight The illustration at the right displays this concept
Fig 12 fulcrum point
10
113 CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
In addition to balancing both ends of the fork lifter we must also balance in all
directions Balancing in all directions is better known as the center of gravity The
center of gravity is that point where all parts of a load or truck are balanced in all
directions and will remain at rest As a driver it is important to remember that anew
center of gravity is created when youre handling a load (as opposed to an empty
load) one that combines both the loads and the truckt cenrer of gravityThink of it like
riding a tricycle If you peddle a tricycle around a corner and shift the center of
gravity forward over the narrowest part of the tricycle you are likely to turn over
But if you shift your weight on the rear and place the center of gravity over the
widest part of the tricycle you are less likely to tip over
Fig 13 center of gravity
Some factors that could cause instability are
Carrying the load too high
Excessively tilting the load forward
Operating on a decline
Heavy braking
Inappropriate use of forklift attachments
11
Off-center loads
uneven terrain
Quick turns
However your potential to turn over can be reduced if you follow a few safety rules
Make sure the load is stable and safely arranged on the forklift
Do not tilt the forks forward except when picking up or depositing a load
Keep the load low just above the pavement with the forks tilted back when traveling
Enter tractor-trailers or elevators squarely when picking up or depositing loads
Drive at a slow enough speed to allow you to stop safely
Drive slowly on wet or slippery surfaces
Avoid driving on unstable surfaces or where there are loose objects on the surface
12 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BLUETOOTH CONTROL FOLK
LIFTER CAR
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car
12
13 PIC16F887 MICROCONTROLLER
PIC stands for ―Peripheral Interface Controller It is having 16 bit CPU amp introduced
by ―Microchip company It is RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
compatible controller This controller has only 35 instructions Its maximum operated
speed is 20 MHz oscillatorclock input The nice things about the controller is that
they are compatible with each other and a program for one model can very easily be
used in many cases with no modification be run on other models of family The basic
assembler instruction set of PIC microcontroller consist of only 35 instructions and
most of family members (except the newly developed devices) use same instruction
set ie why a program developed for one model can run on another model with
same architecture without any changes The PIC microcontroller has INTRRUPT
capability
131 MICROCONTROLLER VERSUS MICROPROCESSOR
A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in many ways The
first and most important difference is its functionality In order the microprocessor
may be used other components such as memory or components for data transfer must
be added to it Even though the microprocessor is considered to be a powerful
computer machine the weak point is that it is not adjusted to communication to
peripheral environment Simply in order to communicate with peripheral
environment the microprocessor must use specialized circuits added as external
chips It means in short that microprocessors are the pure heart of the computers That
is how it was when they appeared and the same is now On the other hand the
microcontroller is designed to be all of that in one No other specialized external
components are needed for its application because all necessary circuits which
otherwise belong to peripherals are already built into it It in any case saves the time
and space needed to design a device
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
3
19 Diodes 27
191 Function 27
192 Forward Voltage Drop 27
193 Reverse Voltage 27
194 Connecting and Soldering 28
110 Resistor 28
1101 Function 29
1102 Resistor Shorthand 29
111 Zener Diode 29
112 Dc Gear Motor 31
1121 External Structure 31
1122 Rear View 33
1123 How Geared Dc Motor Works 33
113 Variable Resistors 37
1131construction 37
1132 Linear (Lin) and Logarithmic (Log) Tracks 38
1133 Potentiometer 39
CHAPTER 2
21 Overview 40
22 Creating A Circuit Design Using Capture 41
4
23 Using Component To Make Schematics 43
24 Connecting Two Components By Wire Connection 45
25 Creating The Netlist 47
26 Designing The Pcb With Layout Plus 49
27 Opening Layout Plus 50
28 Converting Connections Into Tracks 54
29 Broad Outline 55
210 Power Supply For Folk Lifter Car 57
2101 Connectors of A Battery 58
CHAPTER-3 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 Results 60
32 Discussion 60
CHAPTER-4 CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 Conclusion 62
42 Future Scope of Embedded System 63
421 Opportunities 65
5
LIST OF FIGURES
Name of Figure
Page No
Fig 11 folk lifter car 2
Fig 12 fulcrum point 2
Fig 13 center of gravity 3
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car 4
Fig 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor 6
Fig 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers 9
Fig 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module 16
Fig 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller 17
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC 20
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor 21
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator 22
Fig 112 LM 7805 23
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor 26
Fig 114 diodes 27
Fig 115 diode terminal 28
6
Fig 116 color coded register 29
Fig 117 gear dc motor 32
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure 32
Fig119 geared head 33
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view 33
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure 34
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear 34
Fig123 gear dc motor 34
Fig124 gear dc motor gear 35
Fig125 gear dc motor in working 36
Fig 126 variable resistor 37
Fig 127 rheostate symbol 38
Fig128 potentiometer symbol 39
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout 41
Fig 22 New project dialog 42
Fig 23 Powersupplydsn file 42
Fig 24 Place part dialog 44
Fig 25 GND 44
Fig 26 Placing components 45
Fig 27 Connecting components using wire 46
Fig 28 Display properties of the component 46
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 47
Fig 210 Left click power supplydsn 48
7
Fig 211 Create Netlist option 48
Fig 212 Create Netlist tab 49
Fig 213 Netlist created 49
Fig 214 Creating new layout 50
Fig 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design 51
Fig 216 After all footprints are selected 52
Fig 217 Display DRC 52
Fig 218 Edit component 53
Fig 219 Designing circuit 53
Fig 220 Edit segment mode 54
Fig 221 Selecting layer for tracks 54
Fig 222 Converting connection to tracks 55
Fig 223 Selecting obstacle tool 55
Fig 224 Selecting obstacle new 56
Fig 225 Drawing board outline on global layer 56
Fig 226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 57
Fig 227 9 volt battery 58
Fig 228 Battery cap 58
8
CHAPTER-1
INTRODUCTION TO ldquoMINOR PROJECTrdquo
Our project is based on microcontroller in which we have used several steps for
making our project so here we are giving introduction to all the component which we
have used in our project work This project is a Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
For this the android mobile user has to install an application on herhis mobile Then
user needs to turn on the Bluetooth in the mobile The wireless communication
techniques used to control the robot is Bluetooth technology User can use various
commands like move forward reverse stop move left move right These commands
are sent from the Android mobile to the Bluetooth receiver Android based folk lifter
car has a Bluetooth receiver unit which receives the commands and give it to the
microcontroller circuit to control the motors The microcontroller then transmits the
signal to the motor driver IClsquos to operate the motors
11 WHAT IS A FORK LIFTER
A forklift is one type of power industrial truck that comes in different shapes
sizes and forms A forklift can be called a pallet truck rider truck fork truck
or lift truck Yet the ultimate purpose of a forklift is the same to safely allow
one person to lift and move large heavy loads with little effort For the purposes
of this training a forklift is a small or large A forklift operator should be aware
of the multiple parts on a forklift (see diagram below) in order to safely operate
the forklift and be able to detect when an unsafe vehicle needs to be removed
from service industrial truck with a power-operated pronged platform(commonly
known as forks)
9
Fig 11 folk lifter car
111 STABILITY
Forklift stability is an important topic because the leading cause of death and serious
injury involving forklifts stems from overturns caused by forklift instability Forklift
stability can be described by four elements the fulcrum point center of gravity the
stability triangle and the load center
112 FULCRUM POINT
The fulcrum point may sound complicated but think of it this way As children we all
played on seesaws which have a board that is balanced in the riddle by a support
piece This support piece is what is called the fulcrum point On a fork lifterthe
fulcrum point is the front wheels The fulcrum point serves as a support piece to
balance the load and counterweight The illustration at the right displays this concept
Fig 12 fulcrum point
10
113 CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
In addition to balancing both ends of the fork lifter we must also balance in all
directions Balancing in all directions is better known as the center of gravity The
center of gravity is that point where all parts of a load or truck are balanced in all
directions and will remain at rest As a driver it is important to remember that anew
center of gravity is created when youre handling a load (as opposed to an empty
load) one that combines both the loads and the truckt cenrer of gravityThink of it like
riding a tricycle If you peddle a tricycle around a corner and shift the center of
gravity forward over the narrowest part of the tricycle you are likely to turn over
But if you shift your weight on the rear and place the center of gravity over the
widest part of the tricycle you are less likely to tip over
Fig 13 center of gravity
Some factors that could cause instability are
Carrying the load too high
Excessively tilting the load forward
Operating on a decline
Heavy braking
Inappropriate use of forklift attachments
11
Off-center loads
uneven terrain
Quick turns
However your potential to turn over can be reduced if you follow a few safety rules
Make sure the load is stable and safely arranged on the forklift
Do not tilt the forks forward except when picking up or depositing a load
Keep the load low just above the pavement with the forks tilted back when traveling
Enter tractor-trailers or elevators squarely when picking up or depositing loads
Drive at a slow enough speed to allow you to stop safely
Drive slowly on wet or slippery surfaces
Avoid driving on unstable surfaces or where there are loose objects on the surface
12 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BLUETOOTH CONTROL FOLK
LIFTER CAR
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car
12
13 PIC16F887 MICROCONTROLLER
PIC stands for ―Peripheral Interface Controller It is having 16 bit CPU amp introduced
by ―Microchip company It is RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
compatible controller This controller has only 35 instructions Its maximum operated
speed is 20 MHz oscillatorclock input The nice things about the controller is that
they are compatible with each other and a program for one model can very easily be
used in many cases with no modification be run on other models of family The basic
assembler instruction set of PIC microcontroller consist of only 35 instructions and
most of family members (except the newly developed devices) use same instruction
set ie why a program developed for one model can run on another model with
same architecture without any changes The PIC microcontroller has INTRRUPT
capability
131 MICROCONTROLLER VERSUS MICROPROCESSOR
A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in many ways The
first and most important difference is its functionality In order the microprocessor
may be used other components such as memory or components for data transfer must
be added to it Even though the microprocessor is considered to be a powerful
computer machine the weak point is that it is not adjusted to communication to
peripheral environment Simply in order to communicate with peripheral
environment the microprocessor must use specialized circuits added as external
chips It means in short that microprocessors are the pure heart of the computers That
is how it was when they appeared and the same is now On the other hand the
microcontroller is designed to be all of that in one No other specialized external
components are needed for its application because all necessary circuits which
otherwise belong to peripherals are already built into it It in any case saves the time
and space needed to design a device
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
4
23 Using Component To Make Schematics 43
24 Connecting Two Components By Wire Connection 45
25 Creating The Netlist 47
26 Designing The Pcb With Layout Plus 49
27 Opening Layout Plus 50
28 Converting Connections Into Tracks 54
29 Broad Outline 55
210 Power Supply For Folk Lifter Car 57
2101 Connectors of A Battery 58
CHAPTER-3 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 Results 60
32 Discussion 60
CHAPTER-4 CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 Conclusion 62
42 Future Scope of Embedded System 63
421 Opportunities 65
5
LIST OF FIGURES
Name of Figure
Page No
Fig 11 folk lifter car 2
Fig 12 fulcrum point 2
Fig 13 center of gravity 3
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car 4
Fig 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor 6
Fig 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers 9
Fig 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module 16
Fig 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller 17
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC 20
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor 21
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator 22
Fig 112 LM 7805 23
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor 26
Fig 114 diodes 27
Fig 115 diode terminal 28
6
Fig 116 color coded register 29
Fig 117 gear dc motor 32
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure 32
Fig119 geared head 33
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view 33
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure 34
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear 34
Fig123 gear dc motor 34
Fig124 gear dc motor gear 35
Fig125 gear dc motor in working 36
Fig 126 variable resistor 37
Fig 127 rheostate symbol 38
Fig128 potentiometer symbol 39
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout 41
Fig 22 New project dialog 42
Fig 23 Powersupplydsn file 42
Fig 24 Place part dialog 44
Fig 25 GND 44
Fig 26 Placing components 45
Fig 27 Connecting components using wire 46
Fig 28 Display properties of the component 46
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 47
Fig 210 Left click power supplydsn 48
7
Fig 211 Create Netlist option 48
Fig 212 Create Netlist tab 49
Fig 213 Netlist created 49
Fig 214 Creating new layout 50
Fig 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design 51
Fig 216 After all footprints are selected 52
Fig 217 Display DRC 52
Fig 218 Edit component 53
Fig 219 Designing circuit 53
Fig 220 Edit segment mode 54
Fig 221 Selecting layer for tracks 54
Fig 222 Converting connection to tracks 55
Fig 223 Selecting obstacle tool 55
Fig 224 Selecting obstacle new 56
Fig 225 Drawing board outline on global layer 56
Fig 226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 57
Fig 227 9 volt battery 58
Fig 228 Battery cap 58
8
CHAPTER-1
INTRODUCTION TO ldquoMINOR PROJECTrdquo
Our project is based on microcontroller in which we have used several steps for
making our project so here we are giving introduction to all the component which we
have used in our project work This project is a Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
For this the android mobile user has to install an application on herhis mobile Then
user needs to turn on the Bluetooth in the mobile The wireless communication
techniques used to control the robot is Bluetooth technology User can use various
commands like move forward reverse stop move left move right These commands
are sent from the Android mobile to the Bluetooth receiver Android based folk lifter
car has a Bluetooth receiver unit which receives the commands and give it to the
microcontroller circuit to control the motors The microcontroller then transmits the
signal to the motor driver IClsquos to operate the motors
11 WHAT IS A FORK LIFTER
A forklift is one type of power industrial truck that comes in different shapes
sizes and forms A forklift can be called a pallet truck rider truck fork truck
or lift truck Yet the ultimate purpose of a forklift is the same to safely allow
one person to lift and move large heavy loads with little effort For the purposes
of this training a forklift is a small or large A forklift operator should be aware
of the multiple parts on a forklift (see diagram below) in order to safely operate
the forklift and be able to detect when an unsafe vehicle needs to be removed
from service industrial truck with a power-operated pronged platform(commonly
known as forks)
9
Fig 11 folk lifter car
111 STABILITY
Forklift stability is an important topic because the leading cause of death and serious
injury involving forklifts stems from overturns caused by forklift instability Forklift
stability can be described by four elements the fulcrum point center of gravity the
stability triangle and the load center
112 FULCRUM POINT
The fulcrum point may sound complicated but think of it this way As children we all
played on seesaws which have a board that is balanced in the riddle by a support
piece This support piece is what is called the fulcrum point On a fork lifterthe
fulcrum point is the front wheels The fulcrum point serves as a support piece to
balance the load and counterweight The illustration at the right displays this concept
Fig 12 fulcrum point
10
113 CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
In addition to balancing both ends of the fork lifter we must also balance in all
directions Balancing in all directions is better known as the center of gravity The
center of gravity is that point where all parts of a load or truck are balanced in all
directions and will remain at rest As a driver it is important to remember that anew
center of gravity is created when youre handling a load (as opposed to an empty
load) one that combines both the loads and the truckt cenrer of gravityThink of it like
riding a tricycle If you peddle a tricycle around a corner and shift the center of
gravity forward over the narrowest part of the tricycle you are likely to turn over
But if you shift your weight on the rear and place the center of gravity over the
widest part of the tricycle you are less likely to tip over
Fig 13 center of gravity
Some factors that could cause instability are
Carrying the load too high
Excessively tilting the load forward
Operating on a decline
Heavy braking
Inappropriate use of forklift attachments
11
Off-center loads
uneven terrain
Quick turns
However your potential to turn over can be reduced if you follow a few safety rules
Make sure the load is stable and safely arranged on the forklift
Do not tilt the forks forward except when picking up or depositing a load
Keep the load low just above the pavement with the forks tilted back when traveling
Enter tractor-trailers or elevators squarely when picking up or depositing loads
Drive at a slow enough speed to allow you to stop safely
Drive slowly on wet or slippery surfaces
Avoid driving on unstable surfaces or where there are loose objects on the surface
12 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BLUETOOTH CONTROL FOLK
LIFTER CAR
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car
12
13 PIC16F887 MICROCONTROLLER
PIC stands for ―Peripheral Interface Controller It is having 16 bit CPU amp introduced
by ―Microchip company It is RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
compatible controller This controller has only 35 instructions Its maximum operated
speed is 20 MHz oscillatorclock input The nice things about the controller is that
they are compatible with each other and a program for one model can very easily be
used in many cases with no modification be run on other models of family The basic
assembler instruction set of PIC microcontroller consist of only 35 instructions and
most of family members (except the newly developed devices) use same instruction
set ie why a program developed for one model can run on another model with
same architecture without any changes The PIC microcontroller has INTRRUPT
capability
131 MICROCONTROLLER VERSUS MICROPROCESSOR
A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in many ways The
first and most important difference is its functionality In order the microprocessor
may be used other components such as memory or components for data transfer must
be added to it Even though the microprocessor is considered to be a powerful
computer machine the weak point is that it is not adjusted to communication to
peripheral environment Simply in order to communicate with peripheral
environment the microprocessor must use specialized circuits added as external
chips It means in short that microprocessors are the pure heart of the computers That
is how it was when they appeared and the same is now On the other hand the
microcontroller is designed to be all of that in one No other specialized external
components are needed for its application because all necessary circuits which
otherwise belong to peripherals are already built into it It in any case saves the time
and space needed to design a device
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
5
LIST OF FIGURES
Name of Figure
Page No
Fig 11 folk lifter car 2
Fig 12 fulcrum point 2
Fig 13 center of gravity 3
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car 4
Fig 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor 6
Fig 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers 9
Fig 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module 16
Fig 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller 17
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC 20
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor 21
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator 22
Fig 112 LM 7805 23
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor 26
Fig 114 diodes 27
Fig 115 diode terminal 28
6
Fig 116 color coded register 29
Fig 117 gear dc motor 32
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure 32
Fig119 geared head 33
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view 33
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure 34
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear 34
Fig123 gear dc motor 34
Fig124 gear dc motor gear 35
Fig125 gear dc motor in working 36
Fig 126 variable resistor 37
Fig 127 rheostate symbol 38
Fig128 potentiometer symbol 39
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout 41
Fig 22 New project dialog 42
Fig 23 Powersupplydsn file 42
Fig 24 Place part dialog 44
Fig 25 GND 44
Fig 26 Placing components 45
Fig 27 Connecting components using wire 46
Fig 28 Display properties of the component 46
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 47
Fig 210 Left click power supplydsn 48
7
Fig 211 Create Netlist option 48
Fig 212 Create Netlist tab 49
Fig 213 Netlist created 49
Fig 214 Creating new layout 50
Fig 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design 51
Fig 216 After all footprints are selected 52
Fig 217 Display DRC 52
Fig 218 Edit component 53
Fig 219 Designing circuit 53
Fig 220 Edit segment mode 54
Fig 221 Selecting layer for tracks 54
Fig 222 Converting connection to tracks 55
Fig 223 Selecting obstacle tool 55
Fig 224 Selecting obstacle new 56
Fig 225 Drawing board outline on global layer 56
Fig 226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 57
Fig 227 9 volt battery 58
Fig 228 Battery cap 58
8
CHAPTER-1
INTRODUCTION TO ldquoMINOR PROJECTrdquo
Our project is based on microcontroller in which we have used several steps for
making our project so here we are giving introduction to all the component which we
have used in our project work This project is a Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
For this the android mobile user has to install an application on herhis mobile Then
user needs to turn on the Bluetooth in the mobile The wireless communication
techniques used to control the robot is Bluetooth technology User can use various
commands like move forward reverse stop move left move right These commands
are sent from the Android mobile to the Bluetooth receiver Android based folk lifter
car has a Bluetooth receiver unit which receives the commands and give it to the
microcontroller circuit to control the motors The microcontroller then transmits the
signal to the motor driver IClsquos to operate the motors
11 WHAT IS A FORK LIFTER
A forklift is one type of power industrial truck that comes in different shapes
sizes and forms A forklift can be called a pallet truck rider truck fork truck
or lift truck Yet the ultimate purpose of a forklift is the same to safely allow
one person to lift and move large heavy loads with little effort For the purposes
of this training a forklift is a small or large A forklift operator should be aware
of the multiple parts on a forklift (see diagram below) in order to safely operate
the forklift and be able to detect when an unsafe vehicle needs to be removed
from service industrial truck with a power-operated pronged platform(commonly
known as forks)
9
Fig 11 folk lifter car
111 STABILITY
Forklift stability is an important topic because the leading cause of death and serious
injury involving forklifts stems from overturns caused by forklift instability Forklift
stability can be described by four elements the fulcrum point center of gravity the
stability triangle and the load center
112 FULCRUM POINT
The fulcrum point may sound complicated but think of it this way As children we all
played on seesaws which have a board that is balanced in the riddle by a support
piece This support piece is what is called the fulcrum point On a fork lifterthe
fulcrum point is the front wheels The fulcrum point serves as a support piece to
balance the load and counterweight The illustration at the right displays this concept
Fig 12 fulcrum point
10
113 CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
In addition to balancing both ends of the fork lifter we must also balance in all
directions Balancing in all directions is better known as the center of gravity The
center of gravity is that point where all parts of a load or truck are balanced in all
directions and will remain at rest As a driver it is important to remember that anew
center of gravity is created when youre handling a load (as opposed to an empty
load) one that combines both the loads and the truckt cenrer of gravityThink of it like
riding a tricycle If you peddle a tricycle around a corner and shift the center of
gravity forward over the narrowest part of the tricycle you are likely to turn over
But if you shift your weight on the rear and place the center of gravity over the
widest part of the tricycle you are less likely to tip over
Fig 13 center of gravity
Some factors that could cause instability are
Carrying the load too high
Excessively tilting the load forward
Operating on a decline
Heavy braking
Inappropriate use of forklift attachments
11
Off-center loads
uneven terrain
Quick turns
However your potential to turn over can be reduced if you follow a few safety rules
Make sure the load is stable and safely arranged on the forklift
Do not tilt the forks forward except when picking up or depositing a load
Keep the load low just above the pavement with the forks tilted back when traveling
Enter tractor-trailers or elevators squarely when picking up or depositing loads
Drive at a slow enough speed to allow you to stop safely
Drive slowly on wet or slippery surfaces
Avoid driving on unstable surfaces or where there are loose objects on the surface
12 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BLUETOOTH CONTROL FOLK
LIFTER CAR
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car
12
13 PIC16F887 MICROCONTROLLER
PIC stands for ―Peripheral Interface Controller It is having 16 bit CPU amp introduced
by ―Microchip company It is RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
compatible controller This controller has only 35 instructions Its maximum operated
speed is 20 MHz oscillatorclock input The nice things about the controller is that
they are compatible with each other and a program for one model can very easily be
used in many cases with no modification be run on other models of family The basic
assembler instruction set of PIC microcontroller consist of only 35 instructions and
most of family members (except the newly developed devices) use same instruction
set ie why a program developed for one model can run on another model with
same architecture without any changes The PIC microcontroller has INTRRUPT
capability
131 MICROCONTROLLER VERSUS MICROPROCESSOR
A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in many ways The
first and most important difference is its functionality In order the microprocessor
may be used other components such as memory or components for data transfer must
be added to it Even though the microprocessor is considered to be a powerful
computer machine the weak point is that it is not adjusted to communication to
peripheral environment Simply in order to communicate with peripheral
environment the microprocessor must use specialized circuits added as external
chips It means in short that microprocessors are the pure heart of the computers That
is how it was when they appeared and the same is now On the other hand the
microcontroller is designed to be all of that in one No other specialized external
components are needed for its application because all necessary circuits which
otherwise belong to peripherals are already built into it It in any case saves the time
and space needed to design a device
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
6
Fig 116 color coded register 29
Fig 117 gear dc motor 32
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure 32
Fig119 geared head 33
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view 33
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure 34
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear 34
Fig123 gear dc motor 34
Fig124 gear dc motor gear 35
Fig125 gear dc motor in working 36
Fig 126 variable resistor 37
Fig 127 rheostate symbol 38
Fig128 potentiometer symbol 39
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout 41
Fig 22 New project dialog 42
Fig 23 Powersupplydsn file 42
Fig 24 Place part dialog 44
Fig 25 GND 44
Fig 26 Placing components 45
Fig 27 Connecting components using wire 46
Fig 28 Display properties of the component 46
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 47
Fig 210 Left click power supplydsn 48
7
Fig 211 Create Netlist option 48
Fig 212 Create Netlist tab 49
Fig 213 Netlist created 49
Fig 214 Creating new layout 50
Fig 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design 51
Fig 216 After all footprints are selected 52
Fig 217 Display DRC 52
Fig 218 Edit component 53
Fig 219 Designing circuit 53
Fig 220 Edit segment mode 54
Fig 221 Selecting layer for tracks 54
Fig 222 Converting connection to tracks 55
Fig 223 Selecting obstacle tool 55
Fig 224 Selecting obstacle new 56
Fig 225 Drawing board outline on global layer 56
Fig 226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 57
Fig 227 9 volt battery 58
Fig 228 Battery cap 58
8
CHAPTER-1
INTRODUCTION TO ldquoMINOR PROJECTrdquo
Our project is based on microcontroller in which we have used several steps for
making our project so here we are giving introduction to all the component which we
have used in our project work This project is a Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
For this the android mobile user has to install an application on herhis mobile Then
user needs to turn on the Bluetooth in the mobile The wireless communication
techniques used to control the robot is Bluetooth technology User can use various
commands like move forward reverse stop move left move right These commands
are sent from the Android mobile to the Bluetooth receiver Android based folk lifter
car has a Bluetooth receiver unit which receives the commands and give it to the
microcontroller circuit to control the motors The microcontroller then transmits the
signal to the motor driver IClsquos to operate the motors
11 WHAT IS A FORK LIFTER
A forklift is one type of power industrial truck that comes in different shapes
sizes and forms A forklift can be called a pallet truck rider truck fork truck
or lift truck Yet the ultimate purpose of a forklift is the same to safely allow
one person to lift and move large heavy loads with little effort For the purposes
of this training a forklift is a small or large A forklift operator should be aware
of the multiple parts on a forklift (see diagram below) in order to safely operate
the forklift and be able to detect when an unsafe vehicle needs to be removed
from service industrial truck with a power-operated pronged platform(commonly
known as forks)
9
Fig 11 folk lifter car
111 STABILITY
Forklift stability is an important topic because the leading cause of death and serious
injury involving forklifts stems from overturns caused by forklift instability Forklift
stability can be described by four elements the fulcrum point center of gravity the
stability triangle and the load center
112 FULCRUM POINT
The fulcrum point may sound complicated but think of it this way As children we all
played on seesaws which have a board that is balanced in the riddle by a support
piece This support piece is what is called the fulcrum point On a fork lifterthe
fulcrum point is the front wheels The fulcrum point serves as a support piece to
balance the load and counterweight The illustration at the right displays this concept
Fig 12 fulcrum point
10
113 CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
In addition to balancing both ends of the fork lifter we must also balance in all
directions Balancing in all directions is better known as the center of gravity The
center of gravity is that point where all parts of a load or truck are balanced in all
directions and will remain at rest As a driver it is important to remember that anew
center of gravity is created when youre handling a load (as opposed to an empty
load) one that combines both the loads and the truckt cenrer of gravityThink of it like
riding a tricycle If you peddle a tricycle around a corner and shift the center of
gravity forward over the narrowest part of the tricycle you are likely to turn over
But if you shift your weight on the rear and place the center of gravity over the
widest part of the tricycle you are less likely to tip over
Fig 13 center of gravity
Some factors that could cause instability are
Carrying the load too high
Excessively tilting the load forward
Operating on a decline
Heavy braking
Inappropriate use of forklift attachments
11
Off-center loads
uneven terrain
Quick turns
However your potential to turn over can be reduced if you follow a few safety rules
Make sure the load is stable and safely arranged on the forklift
Do not tilt the forks forward except when picking up or depositing a load
Keep the load low just above the pavement with the forks tilted back when traveling
Enter tractor-trailers or elevators squarely when picking up or depositing loads
Drive at a slow enough speed to allow you to stop safely
Drive slowly on wet or slippery surfaces
Avoid driving on unstable surfaces or where there are loose objects on the surface
12 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BLUETOOTH CONTROL FOLK
LIFTER CAR
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car
12
13 PIC16F887 MICROCONTROLLER
PIC stands for ―Peripheral Interface Controller It is having 16 bit CPU amp introduced
by ―Microchip company It is RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
compatible controller This controller has only 35 instructions Its maximum operated
speed is 20 MHz oscillatorclock input The nice things about the controller is that
they are compatible with each other and a program for one model can very easily be
used in many cases with no modification be run on other models of family The basic
assembler instruction set of PIC microcontroller consist of only 35 instructions and
most of family members (except the newly developed devices) use same instruction
set ie why a program developed for one model can run on another model with
same architecture without any changes The PIC microcontroller has INTRRUPT
capability
131 MICROCONTROLLER VERSUS MICROPROCESSOR
A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in many ways The
first and most important difference is its functionality In order the microprocessor
may be used other components such as memory or components for data transfer must
be added to it Even though the microprocessor is considered to be a powerful
computer machine the weak point is that it is not adjusted to communication to
peripheral environment Simply in order to communicate with peripheral
environment the microprocessor must use specialized circuits added as external
chips It means in short that microprocessors are the pure heart of the computers That
is how it was when they appeared and the same is now On the other hand the
microcontroller is designed to be all of that in one No other specialized external
components are needed for its application because all necessary circuits which
otherwise belong to peripherals are already built into it It in any case saves the time
and space needed to design a device
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
7
Fig 211 Create Netlist option 48
Fig 212 Create Netlist tab 49
Fig 213 Netlist created 49
Fig 214 Creating new layout 50
Fig 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design 51
Fig 216 After all footprints are selected 52
Fig 217 Display DRC 52
Fig 218 Edit component 53
Fig 219 Designing circuit 53
Fig 220 Edit segment mode 54
Fig 221 Selecting layer for tracks 54
Fig 222 Converting connection to tracks 55
Fig 223 Selecting obstacle tool 55
Fig 224 Selecting obstacle new 56
Fig 225 Drawing board outline on global layer 56
Fig 226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car 57
Fig 227 9 volt battery 58
Fig 228 Battery cap 58
8
CHAPTER-1
INTRODUCTION TO ldquoMINOR PROJECTrdquo
Our project is based on microcontroller in which we have used several steps for
making our project so here we are giving introduction to all the component which we
have used in our project work This project is a Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
For this the android mobile user has to install an application on herhis mobile Then
user needs to turn on the Bluetooth in the mobile The wireless communication
techniques used to control the robot is Bluetooth technology User can use various
commands like move forward reverse stop move left move right These commands
are sent from the Android mobile to the Bluetooth receiver Android based folk lifter
car has a Bluetooth receiver unit which receives the commands and give it to the
microcontroller circuit to control the motors The microcontroller then transmits the
signal to the motor driver IClsquos to operate the motors
11 WHAT IS A FORK LIFTER
A forklift is one type of power industrial truck that comes in different shapes
sizes and forms A forklift can be called a pallet truck rider truck fork truck
or lift truck Yet the ultimate purpose of a forklift is the same to safely allow
one person to lift and move large heavy loads with little effort For the purposes
of this training a forklift is a small or large A forklift operator should be aware
of the multiple parts on a forklift (see diagram below) in order to safely operate
the forklift and be able to detect when an unsafe vehicle needs to be removed
from service industrial truck with a power-operated pronged platform(commonly
known as forks)
9
Fig 11 folk lifter car
111 STABILITY
Forklift stability is an important topic because the leading cause of death and serious
injury involving forklifts stems from overturns caused by forklift instability Forklift
stability can be described by four elements the fulcrum point center of gravity the
stability triangle and the load center
112 FULCRUM POINT
The fulcrum point may sound complicated but think of it this way As children we all
played on seesaws which have a board that is balanced in the riddle by a support
piece This support piece is what is called the fulcrum point On a fork lifterthe
fulcrum point is the front wheels The fulcrum point serves as a support piece to
balance the load and counterweight The illustration at the right displays this concept
Fig 12 fulcrum point
10
113 CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
In addition to balancing both ends of the fork lifter we must also balance in all
directions Balancing in all directions is better known as the center of gravity The
center of gravity is that point where all parts of a load or truck are balanced in all
directions and will remain at rest As a driver it is important to remember that anew
center of gravity is created when youre handling a load (as opposed to an empty
load) one that combines both the loads and the truckt cenrer of gravityThink of it like
riding a tricycle If you peddle a tricycle around a corner and shift the center of
gravity forward over the narrowest part of the tricycle you are likely to turn over
But if you shift your weight on the rear and place the center of gravity over the
widest part of the tricycle you are less likely to tip over
Fig 13 center of gravity
Some factors that could cause instability are
Carrying the load too high
Excessively tilting the load forward
Operating on a decline
Heavy braking
Inappropriate use of forklift attachments
11
Off-center loads
uneven terrain
Quick turns
However your potential to turn over can be reduced if you follow a few safety rules
Make sure the load is stable and safely arranged on the forklift
Do not tilt the forks forward except when picking up or depositing a load
Keep the load low just above the pavement with the forks tilted back when traveling
Enter tractor-trailers or elevators squarely when picking up or depositing loads
Drive at a slow enough speed to allow you to stop safely
Drive slowly on wet or slippery surfaces
Avoid driving on unstable surfaces or where there are loose objects on the surface
12 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BLUETOOTH CONTROL FOLK
LIFTER CAR
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car
12
13 PIC16F887 MICROCONTROLLER
PIC stands for ―Peripheral Interface Controller It is having 16 bit CPU amp introduced
by ―Microchip company It is RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
compatible controller This controller has only 35 instructions Its maximum operated
speed is 20 MHz oscillatorclock input The nice things about the controller is that
they are compatible with each other and a program for one model can very easily be
used in many cases with no modification be run on other models of family The basic
assembler instruction set of PIC microcontroller consist of only 35 instructions and
most of family members (except the newly developed devices) use same instruction
set ie why a program developed for one model can run on another model with
same architecture without any changes The PIC microcontroller has INTRRUPT
capability
131 MICROCONTROLLER VERSUS MICROPROCESSOR
A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in many ways The
first and most important difference is its functionality In order the microprocessor
may be used other components such as memory or components for data transfer must
be added to it Even though the microprocessor is considered to be a powerful
computer machine the weak point is that it is not adjusted to communication to
peripheral environment Simply in order to communicate with peripheral
environment the microprocessor must use specialized circuits added as external
chips It means in short that microprocessors are the pure heart of the computers That
is how it was when they appeared and the same is now On the other hand the
microcontroller is designed to be all of that in one No other specialized external
components are needed for its application because all necessary circuits which
otherwise belong to peripherals are already built into it It in any case saves the time
and space needed to design a device
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
8
CHAPTER-1
INTRODUCTION TO ldquoMINOR PROJECTrdquo
Our project is based on microcontroller in which we have used several steps for
making our project so here we are giving introduction to all the component which we
have used in our project work This project is a Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
For this the android mobile user has to install an application on herhis mobile Then
user needs to turn on the Bluetooth in the mobile The wireless communication
techniques used to control the robot is Bluetooth technology User can use various
commands like move forward reverse stop move left move right These commands
are sent from the Android mobile to the Bluetooth receiver Android based folk lifter
car has a Bluetooth receiver unit which receives the commands and give it to the
microcontroller circuit to control the motors The microcontroller then transmits the
signal to the motor driver IClsquos to operate the motors
11 WHAT IS A FORK LIFTER
A forklift is one type of power industrial truck that comes in different shapes
sizes and forms A forklift can be called a pallet truck rider truck fork truck
or lift truck Yet the ultimate purpose of a forklift is the same to safely allow
one person to lift and move large heavy loads with little effort For the purposes
of this training a forklift is a small or large A forklift operator should be aware
of the multiple parts on a forklift (see diagram below) in order to safely operate
the forklift and be able to detect when an unsafe vehicle needs to be removed
from service industrial truck with a power-operated pronged platform(commonly
known as forks)
9
Fig 11 folk lifter car
111 STABILITY
Forklift stability is an important topic because the leading cause of death and serious
injury involving forklifts stems from overturns caused by forklift instability Forklift
stability can be described by four elements the fulcrum point center of gravity the
stability triangle and the load center
112 FULCRUM POINT
The fulcrum point may sound complicated but think of it this way As children we all
played on seesaws which have a board that is balanced in the riddle by a support
piece This support piece is what is called the fulcrum point On a fork lifterthe
fulcrum point is the front wheels The fulcrum point serves as a support piece to
balance the load and counterweight The illustration at the right displays this concept
Fig 12 fulcrum point
10
113 CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
In addition to balancing both ends of the fork lifter we must also balance in all
directions Balancing in all directions is better known as the center of gravity The
center of gravity is that point where all parts of a load or truck are balanced in all
directions and will remain at rest As a driver it is important to remember that anew
center of gravity is created when youre handling a load (as opposed to an empty
load) one that combines both the loads and the truckt cenrer of gravityThink of it like
riding a tricycle If you peddle a tricycle around a corner and shift the center of
gravity forward over the narrowest part of the tricycle you are likely to turn over
But if you shift your weight on the rear and place the center of gravity over the
widest part of the tricycle you are less likely to tip over
Fig 13 center of gravity
Some factors that could cause instability are
Carrying the load too high
Excessively tilting the load forward
Operating on a decline
Heavy braking
Inappropriate use of forklift attachments
11
Off-center loads
uneven terrain
Quick turns
However your potential to turn over can be reduced if you follow a few safety rules
Make sure the load is stable and safely arranged on the forklift
Do not tilt the forks forward except when picking up or depositing a load
Keep the load low just above the pavement with the forks tilted back when traveling
Enter tractor-trailers or elevators squarely when picking up or depositing loads
Drive at a slow enough speed to allow you to stop safely
Drive slowly on wet or slippery surfaces
Avoid driving on unstable surfaces or where there are loose objects on the surface
12 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BLUETOOTH CONTROL FOLK
LIFTER CAR
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car
12
13 PIC16F887 MICROCONTROLLER
PIC stands for ―Peripheral Interface Controller It is having 16 bit CPU amp introduced
by ―Microchip company It is RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
compatible controller This controller has only 35 instructions Its maximum operated
speed is 20 MHz oscillatorclock input The nice things about the controller is that
they are compatible with each other and a program for one model can very easily be
used in many cases with no modification be run on other models of family The basic
assembler instruction set of PIC microcontroller consist of only 35 instructions and
most of family members (except the newly developed devices) use same instruction
set ie why a program developed for one model can run on another model with
same architecture without any changes The PIC microcontroller has INTRRUPT
capability
131 MICROCONTROLLER VERSUS MICROPROCESSOR
A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in many ways The
first and most important difference is its functionality In order the microprocessor
may be used other components such as memory or components for data transfer must
be added to it Even though the microprocessor is considered to be a powerful
computer machine the weak point is that it is not adjusted to communication to
peripheral environment Simply in order to communicate with peripheral
environment the microprocessor must use specialized circuits added as external
chips It means in short that microprocessors are the pure heart of the computers That
is how it was when they appeared and the same is now On the other hand the
microcontroller is designed to be all of that in one No other specialized external
components are needed for its application because all necessary circuits which
otherwise belong to peripherals are already built into it It in any case saves the time
and space needed to design a device
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
9
Fig 11 folk lifter car
111 STABILITY
Forklift stability is an important topic because the leading cause of death and serious
injury involving forklifts stems from overturns caused by forklift instability Forklift
stability can be described by four elements the fulcrum point center of gravity the
stability triangle and the load center
112 FULCRUM POINT
The fulcrum point may sound complicated but think of it this way As children we all
played on seesaws which have a board that is balanced in the riddle by a support
piece This support piece is what is called the fulcrum point On a fork lifterthe
fulcrum point is the front wheels The fulcrum point serves as a support piece to
balance the load and counterweight The illustration at the right displays this concept
Fig 12 fulcrum point
10
113 CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
In addition to balancing both ends of the fork lifter we must also balance in all
directions Balancing in all directions is better known as the center of gravity The
center of gravity is that point where all parts of a load or truck are balanced in all
directions and will remain at rest As a driver it is important to remember that anew
center of gravity is created when youre handling a load (as opposed to an empty
load) one that combines both the loads and the truckt cenrer of gravityThink of it like
riding a tricycle If you peddle a tricycle around a corner and shift the center of
gravity forward over the narrowest part of the tricycle you are likely to turn over
But if you shift your weight on the rear and place the center of gravity over the
widest part of the tricycle you are less likely to tip over
Fig 13 center of gravity
Some factors that could cause instability are
Carrying the load too high
Excessively tilting the load forward
Operating on a decline
Heavy braking
Inappropriate use of forklift attachments
11
Off-center loads
uneven terrain
Quick turns
However your potential to turn over can be reduced if you follow a few safety rules
Make sure the load is stable and safely arranged on the forklift
Do not tilt the forks forward except when picking up or depositing a load
Keep the load low just above the pavement with the forks tilted back when traveling
Enter tractor-trailers or elevators squarely when picking up or depositing loads
Drive at a slow enough speed to allow you to stop safely
Drive slowly on wet or slippery surfaces
Avoid driving on unstable surfaces or where there are loose objects on the surface
12 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BLUETOOTH CONTROL FOLK
LIFTER CAR
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car
12
13 PIC16F887 MICROCONTROLLER
PIC stands for ―Peripheral Interface Controller It is having 16 bit CPU amp introduced
by ―Microchip company It is RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
compatible controller This controller has only 35 instructions Its maximum operated
speed is 20 MHz oscillatorclock input The nice things about the controller is that
they are compatible with each other and a program for one model can very easily be
used in many cases with no modification be run on other models of family The basic
assembler instruction set of PIC microcontroller consist of only 35 instructions and
most of family members (except the newly developed devices) use same instruction
set ie why a program developed for one model can run on another model with
same architecture without any changes The PIC microcontroller has INTRRUPT
capability
131 MICROCONTROLLER VERSUS MICROPROCESSOR
A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in many ways The
first and most important difference is its functionality In order the microprocessor
may be used other components such as memory or components for data transfer must
be added to it Even though the microprocessor is considered to be a powerful
computer machine the weak point is that it is not adjusted to communication to
peripheral environment Simply in order to communicate with peripheral
environment the microprocessor must use specialized circuits added as external
chips It means in short that microprocessors are the pure heart of the computers That
is how it was when they appeared and the same is now On the other hand the
microcontroller is designed to be all of that in one No other specialized external
components are needed for its application because all necessary circuits which
otherwise belong to peripherals are already built into it It in any case saves the time
and space needed to design a device
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
10
113 CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
In addition to balancing both ends of the fork lifter we must also balance in all
directions Balancing in all directions is better known as the center of gravity The
center of gravity is that point where all parts of a load or truck are balanced in all
directions and will remain at rest As a driver it is important to remember that anew
center of gravity is created when youre handling a load (as opposed to an empty
load) one that combines both the loads and the truckt cenrer of gravityThink of it like
riding a tricycle If you peddle a tricycle around a corner and shift the center of
gravity forward over the narrowest part of the tricycle you are likely to turn over
But if you shift your weight on the rear and place the center of gravity over the
widest part of the tricycle you are less likely to tip over
Fig 13 center of gravity
Some factors that could cause instability are
Carrying the load too high
Excessively tilting the load forward
Operating on a decline
Heavy braking
Inappropriate use of forklift attachments
11
Off-center loads
uneven terrain
Quick turns
However your potential to turn over can be reduced if you follow a few safety rules
Make sure the load is stable and safely arranged on the forklift
Do not tilt the forks forward except when picking up or depositing a load
Keep the load low just above the pavement with the forks tilted back when traveling
Enter tractor-trailers or elevators squarely when picking up or depositing loads
Drive at a slow enough speed to allow you to stop safely
Drive slowly on wet or slippery surfaces
Avoid driving on unstable surfaces or where there are loose objects on the surface
12 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BLUETOOTH CONTROL FOLK
LIFTER CAR
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car
12
13 PIC16F887 MICROCONTROLLER
PIC stands for ―Peripheral Interface Controller It is having 16 bit CPU amp introduced
by ―Microchip company It is RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
compatible controller This controller has only 35 instructions Its maximum operated
speed is 20 MHz oscillatorclock input The nice things about the controller is that
they are compatible with each other and a program for one model can very easily be
used in many cases with no modification be run on other models of family The basic
assembler instruction set of PIC microcontroller consist of only 35 instructions and
most of family members (except the newly developed devices) use same instruction
set ie why a program developed for one model can run on another model with
same architecture without any changes The PIC microcontroller has INTRRUPT
capability
131 MICROCONTROLLER VERSUS MICROPROCESSOR
A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in many ways The
first and most important difference is its functionality In order the microprocessor
may be used other components such as memory or components for data transfer must
be added to it Even though the microprocessor is considered to be a powerful
computer machine the weak point is that it is not adjusted to communication to
peripheral environment Simply in order to communicate with peripheral
environment the microprocessor must use specialized circuits added as external
chips It means in short that microprocessors are the pure heart of the computers That
is how it was when they appeared and the same is now On the other hand the
microcontroller is designed to be all of that in one No other specialized external
components are needed for its application because all necessary circuits which
otherwise belong to peripherals are already built into it It in any case saves the time
and space needed to design a device
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
11
Off-center loads
uneven terrain
Quick turns
However your potential to turn over can be reduced if you follow a few safety rules
Make sure the load is stable and safely arranged on the forklift
Do not tilt the forks forward except when picking up or depositing a load
Keep the load low just above the pavement with the forks tilted back when traveling
Enter tractor-trailers or elevators squarely when picking up or depositing loads
Drive at a slow enough speed to allow you to stop safely
Drive slowly on wet or slippery surfaces
Avoid driving on unstable surfaces or where there are loose objects on the surface
12 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BLUETOOTH CONTROL FOLK
LIFTER CAR
Fig 14 block diagram of Bluetooth controlled car
12
13 PIC16F887 MICROCONTROLLER
PIC stands for ―Peripheral Interface Controller It is having 16 bit CPU amp introduced
by ―Microchip company It is RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
compatible controller This controller has only 35 instructions Its maximum operated
speed is 20 MHz oscillatorclock input The nice things about the controller is that
they are compatible with each other and a program for one model can very easily be
used in many cases with no modification be run on other models of family The basic
assembler instruction set of PIC microcontroller consist of only 35 instructions and
most of family members (except the newly developed devices) use same instruction
set ie why a program developed for one model can run on another model with
same architecture without any changes The PIC microcontroller has INTRRUPT
capability
131 MICROCONTROLLER VERSUS MICROPROCESSOR
A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in many ways The
first and most important difference is its functionality In order the microprocessor
may be used other components such as memory or components for data transfer must
be added to it Even though the microprocessor is considered to be a powerful
computer machine the weak point is that it is not adjusted to communication to
peripheral environment Simply in order to communicate with peripheral
environment the microprocessor must use specialized circuits added as external
chips It means in short that microprocessors are the pure heart of the computers That
is how it was when they appeared and the same is now On the other hand the
microcontroller is designed to be all of that in one No other specialized external
components are needed for its application because all necessary circuits which
otherwise belong to peripherals are already built into it It in any case saves the time
and space needed to design a device
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
12
13 PIC16F887 MICROCONTROLLER
PIC stands for ―Peripheral Interface Controller It is having 16 bit CPU amp introduced
by ―Microchip company It is RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
compatible controller This controller has only 35 instructions Its maximum operated
speed is 20 MHz oscillatorclock input The nice things about the controller is that
they are compatible with each other and a program for one model can very easily be
used in many cases with no modification be run on other models of family The basic
assembler instruction set of PIC microcontroller consist of only 35 instructions and
most of family members (except the newly developed devices) use same instruction
set ie why a program developed for one model can run on another model with
same architecture without any changes The PIC microcontroller has INTRRUPT
capability
131 MICROCONTROLLER VERSUS MICROPROCESSOR
A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in many ways The
first and most important difference is its functionality In order the microprocessor
may be used other components such as memory or components for data transfer must
be added to it Even though the microprocessor is considered to be a powerful
computer machine the weak point is that it is not adjusted to communication to
peripheral environment Simply in order to communicate with peripheral
environment the microprocessor must use specialized circuits added as external
chips It means in short that microprocessors are the pure heart of the computers That
is how it was when they appeared and the same is now On the other hand the
microcontroller is designed to be all of that in one No other specialized external
components are needed for its application because all necessary circuits which
otherwise belong to peripherals are already built into it It in any case saves the time
and space needed to design a device
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
13
Figure 15 Microcontroller vs Microprocessor
132 FEATURES OF PIC 16f887 MICROCONTROLLERS
RISC architecture
o Only 35 instructions to learn
o All single-cycle instructions except branches
Operating frequency 0-20 MHz
Precision internal oscillator
o Factory calibrated
o Software selectable frequency range of 8MHz to 31KHz
Power supply voltage 20-55V
o Consumption 220uA (20V 4MHz) 11uA (20 V 32 KHz) 50nA (stand-
by mode)
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
14
Power-Saving Sleep Mode
Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option
35 inputoutput pins
o High current sourcesink for direct LED drive
o software and individually programmable pull-up resistor
o Interrupt-on-Change pin
a8K ROM memory in FLASH technology
o Chip can be reprogrammed up to 100000 times
In-Circuit Serial Programming Option
o Chip can be programmed even embedded in the target device
256 bytes EEPROM memory
o Data can be written more than 1000000 times
368 bytes RAM memory
AD converter
o 14-channels
o 10-bit resolution
3 independent timerscounters
Watch-dog timer
Analogue comparator module with
o Two analogue comparators
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
15
o Fixed voltage reference (06V)
o Programmable on-chip voltage reference
PWM output steering control
Enhanced USART module
o Supports RS-485 RS-232 and LIN20
o Auto-Baud Detect
Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
o supports SPI and I2C mode
Although there are several hundred models of PIC microcontrollers choosing a
microcontroller for an application is not a difficult task and requires taking into
account these factors
Number of IO pins required
Required peripherals (eg USARTUSB)
The minimum size of program memory
The minimum size of RAM
Whether or not EEPROM non volatile data memory is required
Speed
Physical size
Cost
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
16
Figure 16 40 Pin Microcontrollers
133 INSIDE A PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Although there are many models of microcontrollers in PIC family they all share
some common features such as program memory data memory IO ports and timers
Some devices have additional features such as AD converters USARTs and so on
Because of these common features we can look at these attributes and cover the
operations of most of devices in family
134 PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory is where your program resides In early microprocessors and
microcontrollers the program memory was EPROM which meant that it had to be
erased using UV light before it could be programmed Most PIC microcontrollers are
based on flash technology where the memory chip can be erased or reprogrammed
using a programmer device Most PIC microcontrollers can also be programmed
without removing from their circuits This process (called in-circuit serial
programming or ISP) speeds up the development cycle and lowers the development
costs Although the program memory is mainly used to store a program there is no
reason why it cannot be used to store constant data used in programsA PIC basis
program have several pages of codes and still fit inside a 1K of program memory The
width of a 14-bit program memory is actually 14-bits It is interesting to note that
PICs are known as 8-bit Microcontrollers This is actually true as far as the width of
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
17
data memory is concerned which is 8-bit wide Microchip calls the 14-bits a word
even though a word is 16-bit wide When a power is applied to Microcontroller or
when MCLR (Master Clear) input is lowered logic 0 execution starts from the Reset
Vector which is first word of program memory Thus the first instruction executed
after a reset is the one located at address 0 of the program memory
135 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
The data memory is used to store all of your program variables This is a RAM which
means that all the data is lost when power is removed The data memory is 8-bit wide
and that is why the PIC microcontrollers are called 8-bit microcontrollers
136 BUS
It is a group of 8 or 16 wires There are three types of buses ie address bus control
bus data bus Address bus consists of many lines as the amount of memory we wish
to address and serves to transmit address from CPU memory Data bus is wide as
data in our case the 8-bit or the connection lines and connect all blocks inside the
microcontroller Control bus is between memory unit and CPU IO unit and CPU
137 IO UNIT
The input and output pins which we have to set which is input or output key is set by
this All these are also called as ―ports There are several types of ports input output
or bidirectional ports When working with ports first of all it is necessary to choose
which port we need to work with and then to send data to or take it from port When
working with it the port acts like a memory location Something is simply being
written into or read from it and it could be noticed on pins of microcontroller
138 PORTS
Port is register inside a microcontroller which is connected by wires to the pin of
controller Ports represent physical connection of Central Processing unit with an
outside world Microcontroller uses them in order to monitor or control other
components or devices Due to functionality some pins have two fold roles like
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
18
RA4T0CK1 for instance which is simultaneously the fourth bit of port A and an
external input for free-run counter Selection of one of these two pins functions is
done in one of the configurationally registers PIC has 5 IO PORTS
14 COMPONENT USED
SN Equipment Quality
1 PIC16F887 1
2 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE 1
3 L293D H BRIDGE IC 2
4 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
5 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
6 DC GEAR MOTOR 3
7 VARIABLE RESISTANCE 3
8 CAPACITANCE (01 uF) 1
9 LM 7812 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1
10 CAPACITANCE (100 nF) 2
11 LED 1
12 ZENER DIODE (33 V) 1
13 RESISTANCE (10K18K) 1
14 SWITCH PUSHBUTTON
15 HC-05 BLUETOOTH MODULE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth is a wireless technology for communication over distances of up to
10m Offering reasonably fast data transfer rates of around 1 Mbs principally
between Battery-powered devices Bluetoothlsquos primary intentis to support the creation
of adhoc Personal area networks (PANs) for small data transfers (or voice
communication) Between devices such as Laptop PDA mobile phones PClsquos
printers digital cameras and video game consoles over a secure globally unlicensed
short-range radio frequency
Bluetooth wireless technology works anywhere in the world because it
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
19
operates at
24 GHz in the globally available license free industrial scientific
and medical (ISM) band
151 SETTING UP CONNECTIONS
Any Bluetooth device in discoverable mode will transmit the following information
on demand
Device name
Device class
List of services
Technical information (for example device features manufacturer Bluetooth
specification used clock offset)
Any device may perform an inquiry to find other devices to connect to and any
device can be configured to respond to such inquiries However if the device trying to
connect knows the address of the device it always responds to direct connection
requests and transmits the information shown in the list above if requested Use of a
devices services may require pairing or acceptance by its owner but the connection
itself can be initiated by any device and held until it goes out of range Some devices
can be connected to only one device at a time and connecting to them prevents them
from connecting to other devices and appearing in inquiries until they disconnect from
the other device
Every device has a unique 48-bit address However these addresses are generally not
shown in inquiries Instead friendly Bluetooth names are used which can be set by
the user This name appears when another user scans for devices and in lists of paired
devices
Most cellular phones have the Bluetooth name set to the manufacturer and model of
the phone by default Most cellular phones and laptops show only the Bluetooth
names and special programs are required to get additional information about remote
devices This can be confusing as for example there could be several cellular phones
in range named T610
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
20
152 PAIRING AND BONDING
Many of the services offered over Bluetooth can expose private data or allow the
connecting party to control the Bluetooth device For security reasons it is necessary
to be able to recognize specific devices and thus enable control over which devices
are allowed to connect to a given Bluetooth device At the same time it is useful for
Bluetooth devices to be able to establish a connection without user intervention (for
example as soon as they are in range)
To resolve this conflict Bluetooth uses a process called bonding and a bond is
generated through a process called pairing The pairing process is triggered either by a
specific request from a user to generate a bond (for example the user explicitly
requests to Add a Bluetooth device) or it is triggered automatically when
connecting to a service where (for the first time) the identity of a device is required
for security purposes These two cases are referred to as dedicated bonding and
general bonding respectively
Pairing often involves some level of user interaction this user interaction is the basis
for confirming the identity of the devices Once pairing successfully completes a
bond will have been formed between the two devices enabling those two devices to
connect to each other in the future without requiring the pairing process in order to
confirm the identity of the devices When desired the bonding relationship can later
be removed by the user
153 IMPLEMENTATION
During the pairing process the two devices involved establish a relationship by
creating a shared secret known as a link key If a link key is stored by both devices
they are said to be paired or bonded A device that wants to communicate only with a
bonded device can cryptographically authenticate the identity of the other device and
so be sure that it is the same device it previously paired with Once a link key has
been generated an authenticated Asynchronous Connection-Less (ACL) link between
the devices may be encrypted so that the data that they exchange over the airwaves is
protected against eavesdropping
Link keys can be deleted at any time by either device If done by either device this
will implicitly remove the bonding between the devices so it is possible for one of the
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
21
devices to have a link key stored but not be aware that it is no longer bonded to the
device associated with the given link key
Bluetooth services generally require either encryption or authentication and as such
require pairing before they allow a remote device to use the given service Some
services such as the Object Push Profile elect not to explicitly require authentication
or encryption so that pairing does not interfere with the user experience associated
with the service use-cases
154 PAIRING MECHANISMS
Pairing mechanisms have changed significantly with the introduction of Secure
Simple Pairing in Bluetooth v21 The following summarizes the pairing mechanisms
Legacy pairing This is the only method available in Bluetooth v20 and before
Each device must enter a PIN code pairing is only successful if both devices enter
the same PIN code Any 16-byte UTF-8 string may be used as a PIN code
however not all devices may be capable of entering all possible PIN codes
o Limited input devices The obvious example of this class of device is a
Bluetooth Hands-free headset which generally have few inputs These
devices usually have a fixed PIN for example 0000 or 1234 that are
hard-coded into the device
o Numeric input devices Mobile phones are classic examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter a numeric value up to 16 digits in
length
o Alpha-numeric input devices PCs and smartphones are examples of these
devices They allow a user to enter full UTF-8 text as a PIN code If pairing
with a less capable device the user needs to be aware of the input
limitations on the other device there is no mechanism available for a
capable device to determine how it should limit the available input a user
may use
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) This is required by Bluetooth v21 although a
Bluetooth v21 device may only use legacy pairing to interoperate with a v20 or
earlier device Secure Simple Pairing uses a form of public key cryptography and
some types can help protect against man in the middle or MITM attacks SSP has
the following characteristics
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
22
o Just works As implied by the name this method just works No user
interaction is required however a device may prompt the user to confirm the
pairing process This method is typically used by headsets with very limited
IO capabilities and is more secure than the fixed PIN mechanism which is
typically used for legacy pairing by this set of limited devices This method
provides no man in the middle (MITM) protection
o Numeric comparison If both devices have a display and at least one can
accept a binary YesNo user input they may use Numeric Comparison This
method displays a 6-digit numeric code on each device The user should
compare the numbers to ensure they are identical If the comparison succeeds
the user(s) should confirm pairing on the device(s) that can accept an input
This method provides MITM protection assuming the user confirms on both
devices and actually performs the comparison properly
o Passkey Entry This method may be used between a device with a display and
a device with numeric keypad entry (such as a keyboard) or two devices with
numeric keypad entry In the first case the display is used to show a 6-digit
numeric code to the user who then enters the code on the keypad In the
second case the user of each device enters the same 6-digit number Both of
these cases provide MITM protection
o Out of band (OOB) This method uses an external means of communication
such as Near Field Communication (NFC) to exchange some information used
in the pairing process Pairing is completed using the Bluetooth radio but
requires information from the OOB mechanism This provides only the level
of MITM protection that is present in the OOB mechanism
o 24 Blue tooth Devices
HC-05 embedded Bluetooth serial communication module (can be short for module)
has two work modes order-response work mode and automatic connection work
mode And there are three work roles (Master Slave and Loopback) at the automatic
connection work mode When the module is at the automatic connection work mode
it will follow the default way set lastly to transmit the data automatically When the
module is at the order-response work mode user can send the AT command to the
module to set the control parameters and sent control order The work mode of
module can be switched by controlling the module PIN (PIO11) input level
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
23
Figure 17 HC-05 Bluetooth Module
SERIAL MODULE PINS
1 PIO8 connects with LED When the module is power on LED will flicker
And the flicker style will indicate which work mode is in using since different
mode has different flicker time interval
2 PIO9 connects with LED It indicates whether the connection is built or not
When the Bluetooth serial is paired the LED will be turned on It means the
connection is built successfully
3 PIO11 is the work mode switch When this PIN port is input high level the
work mode will become order-response work mode While this PIN port is
input low level or suspended in air the work mode will become automatic
connection work mode
4 The module can be reset if it is re-powered since there is a reset circuit at the
module
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
24
Figure 18 Interfacing of Bluetooth module with microcontroller
155 NOTIFICATIONS
HOW TO GET TO THE AT MODE
Way 1
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module
Step 3 Input high level to the PIN34 Then the module will enter to AT mode The
baud rate is as same as the communication time such as 9600 etc
Way 2
Step 1 Connect PIN34 to the power supply PIN
Step 2 Supply power to module (the PIN34 is also supplied with high level since the
PIN34 is connected with power supply PIN) Then the module will enter to AT
module But at this time the baud rate is 38400 In this way user should change the
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
25
baud rate at the AT mode if they forget the communication baud rate
HOW TO GET TO THE COMMUNICATION MODE
Step 1 Input low level to PIN34
Step 2 Supply power to the module Then the module will enter to communication
mode It can be used for pairing
HOW TO SET THIS MODULE BE THE MASTER ROLE
Step 1 Input high level to PIO11
Step 2 Supply power to the module And the module will enter to the order-response
work mode
Step 3 Set the parameters of the super terminal or the other serial tools (baud rate
38400 data bit8 stop bit1 no parity bit no Flow Control)
Step 4 Sent the characters ―AT+ROLE=1rn through serial then receive the
characters ―OKrn Here ―rn is the CRLF
Step 5 Input low level to PIO and supply power to the module again Then this
module will become master role and search the other module (slave role)
automatically to build the connection
NOTES
(1) HC-03 and HC-05lsquos command should end up with ―rn It means when you
finish programming you should add terminator (―ENTER or ―0x0d 0x0a) to the
program Itlsquos different from HC-04 and HC-06 (They donlsquot need terminator)
(2) The most common commands for HC-03 and HC-05 are AT+ROLE (set masterndash
slave) AT+CMODE( set address pairing) AT+PSWD (set password)
If you want the master module has the function of remembering slave module the
most simply way is First set AT+CMODE=1 Make the master module pair with the
slave
module Second set AT+CMODE=0 Then the master module just can make pair
with that specified slave module
(3) When PIN34 keeps high level all commands can be used Otherwise only some
of them can be used
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
26
156 DESCRIPTION OF COMMAND
AT command is case- sensitive should end up with terminator (―enter or ―rn)
1 Test
2 Reset
3 Get the soft version
4 Restore default status
5 Get module Bluetooth address
6 Set inquire devicelsquos name
7 Get the remote Bluetooth devicelsquos name
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
27
8 Set inquire module role
16 L293D H BRIDGE
L293D is a dual h bridge motor driver integrated circuit (IC) Motor drivers act as
current amplifiers since they take a low-current control signal and provide a higher-
current signal This higher current signal is used to drive the motorsL293D contains
two inbuilt H-bridge driver circuits In its common mode of operation two DC motors
can be driven simultaneously both in forward and reverse direction The motor
operations of two motors can be controlled by input logic at pins 2 amp 7 and 10 amp 15
Input logic 00 or 11 will stop the corresponding motor Logic 01 and 10 will rotate it
in clockwise and anticlockwise directions respectively Enable pins 1 and 9
(corresponding to the two motors) must be high for motors to start operating When
an enable input is high the associated driver gets enabled As a result the outputs
become active and work in phase with their inputs Similarly when the enable input is
low that driver is disabled and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state
Fig 19 L293 h bridge IC
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
28
Fig 110 L293 h bridge IC with dc motor
Pin
No
Function Name
1 Enable pin for Motor 1 active high Enable 12
2 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 1
3 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 1
4 Ground (0V) Ground
5 Ground (0V) Ground
6 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 2
7 Input 2 for Motor 1 Input 2
8 Supply voltage for Motors 9-12V (up to 36V) Vcc 2
9 Enable pin for Motor 2 active high Enable 34
10 Input 1 for Motor 1 Input 3
11 Output 1 for Motor 1 Output 3
12 Ground (0V) Ground
13 Ground (0V) Ground
14 Output 2 for Motor 1 Output 4
15 Input2 for Motor 1 Input 4
16 Supply voltage 5V (up to 36V) Vcc 1
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
29
17 LM 7805 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Voltage regulator ICs are the IClsquos that are used to regulate voltage A regulated
power supply is very much essential for several electronic devices due to the
semiconductor material employed in them have a fixed rate of current as well as
voltage The device may get damaged if there is any deviation from the fixed rate
The AC power supply gets converted into constant DC by this circuit By the help of a
voltage regulator DC unregulated output will be fixed to a constant voltage The
circuit is made up of linear voltage regulator 7805 along with capacitors and resistors
with bridge rectifier made up from diodes From giving an unchanging voltage supply
to building confident that output reaches uninterrupted to the appliance the diodes
along with capacitors handle elevated efficient signal conveyal
171 DESCRIPTION
ICs regulator is mainly used in the circuit to maintain the exact voltage which is
followed by the power supply A regulator is mainly employed with the capacitor
connected in parallel to the input terminal and the output terminal of the IC regulator
For the checking of gigantic alterations in the input as well as in the output filter
capacitors are used While the bypass capacitors are used to check the small period
spikes on the input and output level Bypass capacitors are mainly of small values that
are used to bypass the small period pulses straightly into the Earth
A circuit diagram having regulator IC and all the above discussed components
arrangement revealed in the figure below
Fig 111 IC 7805 voltage regulator
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
30
The working of the components coupled in the circuit above is revealed in the
following table
Component Function
C1
This capacitor is known as bypass capacitor and is employed to bypass
extremely tiny duration spikes to the ground with no distress the other
components
C2
C2 is the filter capacitor employed to steady the slow changes in the
voltage applied at the input of the circuit Escalating the value of the
capacitor amplify the stabilization as well as the declining value of the
capacitor reduces the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone
capable to ensure very constricted period spikes emerge at the input
C3
C3 is known as a filter capacitor employed in the circuit to steady the
slow alterations in the output voltage Raising the value of the capacitor
enlarges the stabilization furthermore declining the value of the capacitor
declined the stabilization Moreover this capacitor is not alone capable to
ensure very fine duration spikes happen at the output
C4 C4 is known as bypass capacitor and worked to bypass very small period
spikes to the earth with no influence the other components
U1
U1 is the IC with positive DC and it upholds the output voltage steady
exactly at a constant value even although there are major deviation in the
input voltage
As we have made the whole circuit till now to be operated on the 5V DC supply so
we have to use an IC regulator for 5V DC And the most generally used IC regulators
get into the market for 5V DC regulation use is 7805 So we are connecting the
similar IC in the circuit as U1
IC 7805 is a DC regulated IC of 5V This IC is very flexible and is widely employed
in all types of circuit like a voltage regulator It is a three terminal device and mainly
called input output and ground Pin diagram of the IC 7805 is shown in the diagram
below
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
31
Fig 112 LM 7805
The pin explanation of the 7805 is described in the following table
PIN
NO PIN DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT In this pin of the IC positive unregulated voltage is given in
regulation
2 GROUND In this pin where the ground is given This pin is neutral for
equally the input and output
3 OUTPUT The output of the regulated 5V volt is taken out at this pin of the
IC regulator
In the circuit diagram C2 as well as C3 are filter capacitor while bypass capacitors are
the C1 and C4The electrolytic polarized capacitors are employed for this purposeFor
the purpose of filter capacitors normally 10mfd value of the capacitor used And in
these projects we also used 100mfd value of the capacitor While in all kinds of circuit
the value of bypass capacitor is 01 mfd And in generally un-polarized mainly disc
capacitors employed for this purpose Currently we have the circuit for the 5V DC
positive regulation and we are also familiar with the component values used in the
circuit In the table below we have mentioned the value in detail of all the components
used in the circuit of 5V DC positive regulator
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
1 C1 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
32
SNO COMPONENT TYPE VALUE
2 C2 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
3 C3 CAPACITOR 1000 mfd
4 C4 CAPACITOR 01 mfd
5 U1 POSITIVE DC REGULATOR 7805
18 CAPACITOR
Capacitor is electronic component constructed electronic circuit There are a variety
of capacitors which have various materials and construction Typical classification of
capacitors shows in Fig1 This technical guide summarizes the outline and use
technique of aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is increasing in accordance with
miniaturization of electronic components The type of capacitors can be selected from
the circuit characteristics Generally you can select it by capacitance and voltage in
Table-1 About what each type have in common reliability and price will be
considered as well as performances such as frequency characteristics and temperature
dependence etc shown in Table-2We have many types of capacitors trying to meet
various customerlsquos needs Capacitors (especially aluminum electrolytic capacitors)
are sensitive to operating condition
181 FUNCTION
Capacitors store electric charge They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge They are used to smooth
varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge They are also used in filter
circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but they block DC
(constant) signals This is a measure of a capacitors ability to store charge A large
capacitance means that more charge can be stored Capacitance is measured in farads
symbol F However 1F is very large so prefixes are used to show the smaller values
Three prefixes (multipliers) are used micro (micro) n (nano) and p (pico)
micro means 10-6
(millionth) so 1000000microF = 1F
n means 10-9
(thousand-millionth) so 1000nF = 1microF
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
33
p means 10-12
(million-millionth) so 1000pF = 1nF
Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems There are many types of capacitor but they
can be split into two groups polarised and unpolarised Each group has its own circuit
symbol
182 POLARISED CAPACITORS (LARGE VALUES 1microF +)
Examples Circuit symbol
Fig 113 polar and non-polar capacitor
183 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct way
round at least one of their leads will be marked + or - They are not damaged by heat
when soldering There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors axial where the
leads are attached to each end (220microF in picture) and radial where both leads are at
the same end (10microF in picture) Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they
stand upright on the circuit board It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors
because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating The voltage
rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when
selecting an electrolytic capacitor If the project parts list does not specify a voltage
choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the projects power supply
voltage 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
34
19 DIODES
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 114 diodes
191 FUNCTION
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction
The arrow of the circuit symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow
Diodes are the electrical version of a valve and early diodes were actually called
valves
192 FORWARD VOLTAGE DROP
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode rather like a
person pushing through a door with a spring This means that there is a small voltage
across a conducting diode it is called the forward voltage drop and is about 07V for
all normal diodes which are made from silicon The forward voltage drop of a diode is
almost constant whatever the current passing through the diode so they have a very
steep characteristic (current-voltage graph)
193 REVERSE VOLTAGE
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect diode does not conduct but all real diodes
leak a very tiny current of a few microA or less This can be ignored in most circuits
because it will be very much smaller than the current flowing in the forward direction
However all diodes have a maximum reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if
this is exceeded the diode will fail and pass a large current in the reverse direction
this is called breakdown Ordinary diodes can be split into two types Signal diodes
which pass small currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
35
currents In addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at
the bottom of this page)
194 CONNECTING AND SOLDERING
Diodes must be connected the correct way round the diagram may be labeled a or +
for anode and k or - for cathode (yes it really is k not c for cathode) The cathode is
marked by a line painted on the body Diodes are labeled with their code in small
print you may need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal diodes Small
signal diodes can be damaged by heat when soldering but the risk is small unless you
are using a germanium diode (codes beginning OA) in which case you should use
a heat sink clipped to the lead between the joint and the diode body A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink
Fig 115 diode terminal
110 RESISTOR
bull A resistor is an electrical component designed to have a specific resistance (or
opposition) to the flow of electrons measured in ohms (Ω)
bull When installing a remote start or security system resistors of a specific resistance
may be needed to interface with the vehiclelsquos circuits Some of a vehiclelsquos circuits
may require a reduced voltage to operate a specific accessory or function A resistor
can be added to reduce the trigger voltage to the circuit Resistors will not be required
on most installations but will be required for installations on many newer vehicles
For example on a 2002 Dodge Intrepid a positive pulse through a 2700-Ohm resistor
to the door lock wire will lock the doors If resistors are not included with the system
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
36
you purchased they can be found at almost any electronics parts store such as Radio
Shack
bull Carbon-film resistors are the type most commonly used in vehicle security and
convenience applications Color bands on the resistor will indicate the value in ohms
as well as its tolerance in a plus or minus percentage of accuracy Resistors also have
a watt rating to indicate the amount of power it can handle If you exceed the power
rating of a resistor it will overheat and burn
Example Circuit symbol
Fig 116 color coded register
1101 FUNCTION
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current for example a resistor is placed in series
with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the LED
1102 RESISTOR SHORTHAND
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system which
avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot Instead the
letters R K and M are used in place of the decimal point To read the code replace
the letter with a decimal point then multiply the value by 1000 if the letter was K or
1000000 if the letter was M The letter R means multiply by 1
111 ZENER DIODE
It was noted earlier that the reverse-bias saturation current of a general-purpose
junction diode is so small that it ordinarily is masked by currents associated with
high-resistance conducting paths across the junction But currents associated with
other phenomena occurring in what is a very complex physical junction environment
also can mask the leakage current If the reverse-bias voltage magnitude is increased
above a threshold (the specific value depends on the junction geometry and material
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
37
parameters) one or the other (possibly even both concurrently) of two new phenomena
occur These phenomena which are different from the junction phenomena described
before establish a new mechanism of current flow generically referred to as Zener
breakdownlsquo which masks the junction reverse-bias leakage current In the breakdown
region of operation large current changes occur with very small changes in reverse-
bias voltage similar to forward-bias operation but for quite different reasons These
phenomena occur in all semiconductor junction diodes However the reverse-bias
breakdown voltage characteristic can be reproduced with considerable precision by
controlling doping and other manufacturing process parameters For ordinary use
diode breakdown is characterized simply by specification of a minimum reverse-bias
breakdown voltage and current the magnitude of the breakdown voltage is
guaranteed to be no less and the current (for a specified lower voltage) no more than
specified values Such diodes are not intended specifically for operation in reverse
breakdown and are expected to maintain a low-conduction state when operated in
reverse-bias within the specified breakdown voltage limit Diodes whose reverse-
breakdown characteristics are controlled precisely during manufacture commonly are
called Zener diodes Zener diodes command a premium because of the special
production controls and selection and are intended specifically for operation in the
reverse-breakdown mode primarily as inexpensive voltage references Zener Diode
Breakdown Characteristics ordinarily the reverse-bias blocking action of a PN
junction allows only a small leakage current to flow However if a sufficiently large
reverse-bias is applied other junction phenomena develop which dominate the leakage
current allowing in effect much larger reverse-bias currents This is the breakdown
part of the diode characteristic breakdown here refers to the overshadowing of the
semiconductor junction behavior by other phenomena rather than to a destructive
effect While all diodes display this reverse-bias breakdown phenomenon Zener
diodes are manufactured specifically for operation in the breakdown condition with
guaranteed specifications The breakdown parameters of these Zener (or voltage
reference) diodes receive special processing attention during their manufacture Two
distinct phenomena acting individually or concurrently depending on diode details
are involved in the breakdown phenomena One mechanism is associated with the
acceleration of carriers across the very strong junction electric field Kinetic energy
gained by an accelerated carrier if sufficiently great can cause additional impurity
atom ionization during a collision with the atom Each additional carrier is then also
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
38
accelerated and may cause additional ionization the ionization grows exponentially
This is termed the avalanche effectlsquo recalling the initiation of a massive snow slide
by a small initial snowball Circuits Zener Diode 2 M H Miller The second
mechanism is a quantum mechanical effect more difficult to describe by a familiar
analogy Quantum mechanics predicts the possibility of a spontaneous crossing of a
semiconductor junction by carriers subject to a strong electric field This is called the
tunnel effectlsquo because the phenomena is not associated with ordinary mechanics it
was suggested facetiously that some sort of metaphysical tunnel existed through
which carriers somehow traveled out of ordinary sight While the breakdown
characteristics for the two phenomena are not exactly the same they are close enough
so that the distinction largely may be ignored in general for purposes of circuit design
Thus although the Zener effect originally referred to the quantum mechanical
phenomena the label Zener diode is applied almost universally whatever the details of
the breakdown mechanism
112 DC GEAR MOTOR
Geared DC motors can be defined as an extension of DC motor which already had its
Insight details demystified A geared DC Motor has a gear assembly attached to the
motor The speed of motor is counted in terms of rotations of the shaft per minute and
is termed as RPM The gear assembly helps in increasing the torque and reducing the
speed Using the correct combination of gears in a gear motor its speed can be
reduced to any desirable figure This concept where gears reduce the speed of the
vehicle but increase its torque is known as gear reduction This Insight will explore
all the minor and major details that make the gear head and hence the working of
geared DC motor
1121 EXTERNAL STRUCTURE
At the first sight the external structure of a DC geared motor looks as a straight
expansion over the simple DC ones
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
39
Fig 117 gear dc motor
The lateral view of the motor shows the outer protrudes of the gear head A nut is
placed near the shaft which helps in mounting the motor to the other parts of the
assembly
Fig118 gear dc motor external structure
Also an internally threaded hole is there on the shaft to allow attachments or
extensions such as wheel to be attached to the motor The outer body of the gear head
is made of high density plastic but it is quite easy to open as only screws are used to
attach the outer and the inner structure The major reason behind this could be to
lubricate gear head from time to time The plastic body has a threading through which
nut can be easily mounted and vice versa from the gear head
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
40
Fig119 geared head
1122 REAR VIEW
The rear view of the geared motor is similar to the DC motor and it has two wires
soldered to it
Fig120 DC gear motor rear view
1123 HOW GEARED DC MOTOR WORKS
On opening the outer plastic casing of the gear head gear assemblies on the top as
well as on bottom part of the gear head are visible These gear assemblies are highly
lubricated with grease so as to avoid any sort of wear and tear due to frictional forces
Shown below is the top part of the gear head It is connected to rotating shaft and has
one gear that allows the rotation A strong circular imprint shows the presence of the
gear that rotates the gear at the upper portion
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
41
Fig121 dc gear motor internal structure
Fig122 Connection of the shaft with the gear
A closer look at the bottom gear assembly shows the structure and connection with
other gears
Fig123 gear dc motor
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
42
Gear assemblylsquos association with the motor (bottom gear assembly) can be
understood with the help of the image shown below
Fig124 gear dc motor gear
The gear assembly is set up on two metallic cylinders whose working can be called as
similar to that of an axle A total of three gears combine on these two cylinders to
form the bottom gear assembly out of which two gears share the same axle while one
gear comes in between them and takes a separate axle The gears are basically in form
of a small sprocket but since they are not connected by a chain they can be termed as
duplex gears in terms of a second cog arrangement coaxially over the base Among
the three gears two are exactly same while the third one is bigger in terms of the
number of teeth at the upper layer of the duplex gear The third gear is connected to
the gear at the upper portion of the gear head The manner in which they are located
near the upper part of the gear head can be seen through the image shown below The
combination of bottom gear assembly with the upper one can be seen down under
The DC motor works over a fair range of voltage The higher the input voltage more
is the RPM (rotations per minute) of the motor For example if the motor works in the
range of 6-12V it will have the least RPM at 6V and maximum at 12 V
In terms of voltage we can put the equation as
RPM= K1 V where
K1= induced voltage constant
V=voltage applied
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
43
Fig125 gear dc motor in working
The working of the gears is very interesting to know It can be explained by the
principle of conservation of angular momentum The gear having smaller radius will
cover more RPM than the one with larger radius However the larger gear will give
more torque to the smaller gear than vice versa The comparison of angular velocity
between input gear (the one that transfers energy) to output gear gives the gear ratio
When multiple gears are connected together conservation of energy is also followed
The direction in which the other gear rotates is always the opposite of the gear
adjacent to itIn any DC motor RPM and torque are inversely proportional Hence the
gear having more torque will provide a lesser RPM and converse In a geared DC
motor the concept of pulse width modulation is applied The equations detailing the
working and torque transfer of gears In a geared DC motor the gear connecting the
motor and the gear head is quite small hence it transfers more speed to the larger
teeth part of the gear head and makes it rotate The larger part of the gear further turns
the smaller duplex part The small duplex part receives the torque but not the speed
from its predecessor which it transfers to larger part of other gear and so on The third
gearlsquos duplex part has more teeth than others and hence it transfers more torque to the
gear that is connected to the shaft
113 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Resistors found on circuit boards are normally fixed in value Some resistors found in
the motor vehicle are variable Variable resistors can have their value altered by
movement of a slide or by temperature change The three types of variable resistors
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
44
are Rheostats Potentiometers and Thermistors Variable resistors can be linear
meaning that their resistance value varies proportionally with movement or
temperature change or non-linear where the resistance change is not proportional
with movement
1131CONSTRUCTION
Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and
a wiper which moves along the track as you turn the spindle The track may be made
from carbon cermet (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low
resistances) The track is usually rotary but straight track versions usually called
sliders are also available Variable resistors may be used as
a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as
a potentiometer with all three connections in use Miniature versions
called presets are made for setting up circuits which will not require further
adjustment
Variable resistors are often called potentiometers They are specified by their
maximum resistance linear or logarithmic track and their physical size The standard
spindle diameter is 6mmThe resistance and type of track are marked on the body 4K7
LIN means 47 k linear track 1M LOG means 1 M logarithmic track
Some variable resistors are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board but
most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with
stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board
Fig 126 variable resistor
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
45
1132 LINEAR (LIN) AND LOGARITHMIC (LOG) TRACKS
Linear (LIN) track means that the resistance changes at a constant rate as you move
the wiper This is the standard arrangement and you should assume this type is
required if a project does not specify the type of track Presets always have linear
tracks
Logarithmic (LOG) track means that the resistance changes slowly at one end of the
track and rapidly at the other end so halfway along the track is not half the total
resistance This arrangement is used for volume (loudness) controls because the
human ear has a logarithmic response to loudness so fine control (slow change) is
required at low volumes and coarser control (rapid change) at high volumes It is
important to connect the ends of the track the correct way round if you find that
turning the spindle increases the volume rapidly followed by little further change you
should swap the connections to the ends of the track
Rheostat This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor Two terminals are
used one connected to an end of the track the other to the moveable wiper Turning
the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the
maximum resistance Rheostats are often used to vary current for example to control
the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges
If the rheostat is mounted on a printed circuit board you may find that all three
terminals are connected However one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal
This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function
electrically
Fig 127 rheostate symbol
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
46
1133 POTENTIOMETER
Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected This
arrangement is normally used to vary voltage for example to set the switching point
of a circuit with a sensor or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit If
the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the
wiper terminal will provide a voltage which can be varied from zero up to the
maximum of the supply
Fig128 potentiometer symbol
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
47
CHAPTER 2
21 OVERVIEW
There are several basic steps involved in producing a printed circuit board (PCB)
Most designs begin with a hand drawn schematic and design plan With these the
circuit is prototyped and tested to verify that the design works correctly Then using
software an electronic version of the schematic is created A net list file is created
from the electronic schematic and used in other software to create the physical layout
of the PCB Next the components are placed and routed in the physical layout
software and Gerber files are created These Gerber files are used in a prototyping
system to mill drill and cut the PCB substrate The components are then placed and
soldered to the substrate Finally the board is tested to verify that it works as
expected
The major steps in the PCB design and fabrication process are as follows
1 Design and test the prototype circuitmdash by hand
2 Capture the circuitlsquos schematic using- Or CAD Capture or similar software
3 Perform the physical layout of the circuitmdash using OrCAD Layout or similar
software
4 Fabricate populate and test the PCBmdash done by ECE shop personnel or similar
personnel
With this general procedural framework in mind read on to learn more about each
step in this process
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
48
Fig 21flow chart of PCB layout
1 Prototyping
With a basic idea in mind a circuit schematic is developed and analyzed to ensure the
desired functionality and performance When creating a circuit for PCB production a
designer would also select specific components at this time Commonly the next step
is to prototype and to test the circuit It is also possible to use the schematic capture
software along with related software to simulate the circuit without building it on a
prototyping board In the case of the example circuit a rough sketched schematic was
initially created along with some design specifications The necessary components
were chosen and the circuit was built on a prototyping board to verify that it met the
design criteria During the prototype board layout phase thought was given to the best
way to arrange the components for the final PCB layout As a result the PCB layout
is very similar to the protoboard layout you
22 CREATING A CIRCUIT DESIGN USING CAPTURE
Before you make a PCB layout you need to have a circuit to layout You will use
capture to make tke schematic so the first step is to start the capture capture is started
by following steps
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
49
To open capture CIS from windows start menu select programgtgtorcad
103gtgtcapture CIS
Select filegtgtproject from the new project window give your project a name
select ldquoschematicrdquoclick ok
Figure 22 New project dialog
In the browse option give the location of a folder where you want to save your
file and click ok
On this page double click on the power supplydsn on left side then double
click on schmetic then double click on page1 to on schematic page
On double clicking a empty page will opened We will draw our schematic on
this page We can increase and decrease the size of our page according to
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
50
requirement This page contain scales in X and Y direction Which give
location of any point
Figure 23 Powersupplydsn file
23 USING COMPONENT TO MAKE SCHEMATICS
Next we draw the schematic To get parts go to places -gtpart if no parts are visible
in the ―place part dialog simply click the ―add library button Inside the browse file
dialog click on the olb file then press ctrl+Arrow to select certain files and hit the
―open file button
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
51
Figure 24 Place part dialog
Remember we always need a ground in the circuit this can be found in the
place ground menu accessible by clicking GND button on the right side of the
screen The ground we will use is the 0source identified by the symbol
Figure 25 GND
Moving rotating and other part manipulation functions can be accomplished
through the edit menu at the top of the screen or right click with part selected
Warning When making changes be careful parts may become disconnected
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
52
Figure 26 Placing components
24 CONNECTING TWO COMPONENTS BY WIRE
CONNECTION
Once part has been placed use placewire or click on the ―wire icon to
allow you to wire the circuit The cursor changes to a cross hair which can be
used to connect valid connection points The cursor changes to a cross hair
which may be used to connect between valid connection point and then release
it To change the direction of a wire left-click at the point where the direction
is to be changed
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
53
Figure 27 Connecting components using wire
To change the values double click on the value itself (not on the component)
and in the resulting window after the value eg in the value window change
the 0 to 5 (for 5V DC)
Figure 28 Display properties of the component
With the help of this dialog box we can change the orientation of our
components We can rotate it through 90180 angle
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
54
The final schematic is shown as
Fig29 Orcad capture of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
25 CREATING THE NETLIST
Minimize the schematic that you have made in capture and left click on the
power supplydsn
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
55
Figure 210 Left click power supplydsn
From the tool menu click on the create netlistoption to make netlist
Figure 211 Create Netlist option
Once net list is created it will be shown in the output folder While creating the
net list select the layout tab
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
56
Figure 212 Create Netlist tab
Figure 213 Netlist created
Now we are ready for the layout creation because we will use this netlist file in
the layout
26 DESIGNING THE PCB WITH LAYOUT PLUS
Layout plus is a circuit board layout tool that accepts a layout-compatible circuit
netlist (ex From capture CIS) and generates an output layout files that suitable for
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
57
PCB fabrication Simple steps in producing PCB layout involve importing netlist
placing components routing and generating output files and reports
27 OPENING LAYOUT PLUS
To open the layout plus from windows start menu select programgtgtOrCAD
103gtgtlayout plus
Go to filegtgtnew to create a new design You will see the dialog as shown in fig
below
Figure 214 Creating new layout
Dialog box as shown in figure below enter the default technology template
located on cCrCAD CrCAD_103toolslayout plusdata_defaulttch in
―Input layout TCH text box
Enter the net list (generated in the capture CIS) of your design in ―input MNL
textbox And then the location and file name that you want the file design to
be saved in output ―layout text box
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
58
Layout plus will give the output layout file name as same as the input netlist
file by default If you change file do not change the output file extension
(max) Then apply ECO
There are three browse boxes In first box we have to provide the path for the
input layout file that we have created in capture
Figure 215 Auto ECO tab after creating new design
Layout will display the dialog shown in figure 213 after you apply ECO In
case footprint linking error (missing footprint on same components) you will
need to give the footprint to all missing components to complete AutoECO
Hit ―Accept this ECO to import the netlist into layout plus Figure shows the
layout plus window after importing a netlist
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
59
Figure 216 After all footprints are selected
As you apply the ECO a new design is opened
All the yellow line shown in the layout is the connection If you want to
change the pad of the any components first disable the drc from the tool
menu
Figure 217 Display DRC
Now double click the component
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
60
Figure 218 Edit component
Now place the component according to the requirement so the minimum
connections overlap each other
Figure 219 Designing circuit
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
61
28 CONVERTING CONNECTIONS INTO TRACKS
Now click on the edit segment mode button from tool menu to start
conversion of connection into tracks
Figure 220 Edit segment mode
Left click on the any connection how it get started to change in red line
Before this select the bottom layer from the tool bar
Figure 221 Selecting layer for tracks
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
62
Now move the cursor toward the yellow connection so that we will completely
convert connection into track
Figure 222 Converting connection to tracks
29 BROAD OUTLINE
Now make the board outline For this select the obstacle option from the tool
Figure 223 Selecting obstacle tool
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
63
Now again go to tools obstacle option click newand broad outline
Figure 224 Selecting obstacle new
Figure 225 Drawing board outline on global layer
The empty space is filled by copper pour
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
64
Fig226 Orcad layout of Bluetooth controlled folk lifter car
210 POWER SUPPLY FOR FOLK LIFTER CAR
The most common form of nine-volt battery is commonly called the transistor
battery which was introduced for the early transistor radios It has a rectangular prism
shape with rounded edges and a polarized snap connector at the top This type is
commonly used in pocket radios and other small electronic devices They are also
used as backup power to keep the time in certain electronic clocks This format is
commonly available in primary carbon-zinc and alkaline chemistry in primary
lithium iron disulfide and in rechargeable form in nickel-cadmium nickel-metal
hydride and lithium-ion Mercury oxide batteries in this form have not been
manufactured in many years due to their mercury content This type is designated
NEDA 1604 IEC 6F22 and Ever Ready type PP3 (zinc-carbon) or MN1604 6LR61
(alkaline)Most nine-volt alkaline batteries are constructed of six individual 15V
LR61 cells enclosed in a wrapperThese cells are slightly smaller than LR8D425
AAAA cells and can be used in their place for some devices even though they are
35 mm shorter Carbon-zinc types are made with six flat cells in a stack enclosed in
a moisture-resistant wrapper to prevent drying As of 2007 9-volt batteries accounted
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
65
for 4 of alkaline primary battery sales in the US In Switzerland as of 2008 9-volt
batteries totalled 2 of primary battery sales and 2 of secondary battery sales Other
nine-volt batteries of different sizes exist such as the British Ever Ready PP series
and certain lantern battery
Fig 227 9 volt battery
2101 CONNECTORS OF A BATTERY
Fig 228 Battery cap
The battery has both terminals in a snap connector on one end The smaller circular
(male) terminal is positive and the larger hexagonal or octagonal (female) terminal is
the negative contact The connectors on the battery are the same as on the connector
itself the smaller one connects to the larger one and vice versa The same snap style
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
66
connector is used on other battery types in the Power Pack (PP) series Battery
polarization is normally obvious since mechanical connection is usually only possible
in one configuration A problem with this style of connector is that it is very easy to
connect two batteries together in a short circuit which quickly discharges both
batteries generating heat and possibly a fire An advantage is that several nine-volt
batteries can be connected to each other in series to provide higher voltages
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
67
CHAPTER-3
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
31 RESULTS
In our minor project we have made a Bluetooth control folk lifter car with the help of
Bluetooth module By using interfacing of these modules we made this projects which
are application of the module which are discussed above This projects using modules
helps in making the devices which we use in our daily life or we may increase the part
of technology in our life The projects that we made using the modules
Bluetooth Module
- Bluetooth based LCD display
- Bluetooth based LED display
-Bluetooth based robotic car
- Bluetooth based home appliances controlling
- Bluetooth based motor monitoring system
32 DISCUSSION
Embedded Technology is now in its prime and the wealth of knowledge available is
mind blowing There are many open source designs available for study and use by
anyone from a hobbyist to an engineer Before moving into a detailed discussion on
embedded systems it is best to understand the essence of an embedded system What
can we call an embedded system and how is it different from a computer There are
many answers each coming from experts treating these systems from different point
of views But almost all definitions agree on a few basic characteristics of an
embedded system
It is a system built to perform its duty completely or partially independent of human
intervention
It is specially designed to perform a few tasks in the most efficient way
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
68
It interacts with physical elements in our environment viz controlling and driving a
motor sensing temperature etc
One of the most important distinguishing factor between an embedded system and a
computer is the constraints on system resources Unlike modern day computers an
embedded system is usually designed to be compact energy efficient and
inexpensive Another factor is that a computer is capable of performing a variety of
tasks completely independent of each other Though many advanced embedded
systems exhibit multi-tasking capabilities it is unreasonable to expect a system
operating on washing machines to provide capability to play digital music From an
implementation viewpoint there is a major difference between a computer and an
embedded system Embedded systems are often required to provide Real-Time
response A Real-Time system is defined as a system whose correctness depends on
the timeliness of its response Examples of such systems are flight control systems of
an aircraft sensor systems in nuclear reactors and power plants For these systems
delay in response is a fatal error A more relaxed version of Real-Time Systems is the
one where timely response with small delays is acceptable An example of such a
system would be the Scheduling Display System on the railway platforms In
technical terminology Real-Time System scan be classified as
Hard Real-Time Systems- Systems with severe constraints on the timeliness of the
response
Soft Real-Time Systems- Systems which tolerate small variations in response
times
Hybrid Real-Time Systems- Systems which exhibit both hard and soft constraints
on its performance
As we go into more detail about these systems we will learn that Real-Time
constraints pose a very difficult implementation problem Complex problems like
scheduling and resource management do tend to appear like ten headed fire breathing
dragons to most newcomers in this field
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
69
CHAPTER-4
CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE
41 CONCLUSION
Embedded systems are very different from any general-purpose computer in many
ways Typical characteristics of such systems are explained below
1 Single function Unlike software packages such as word processor spreadsheet and
web browser or a database in a library or in a bank embedded system executes only
one program repeatedly
2 Interact with real world directly These systems are usually directly connected to
real-world environment via various sensors and interfacing modules Users can
directly control or change their parameters as and when needed
3 Works under tight constraints Embedded systems have limited resources in terms
of memory processing power and peripherals to interact with other systems Power
constraints are also major such that many devices need to run using small sized
batteries for many years without faltering Besides this the form factor (physical
footprint) weight material cost etc are common constraints on embedded systems
4 Mostly built as reactive mechanism Since embedded systems are built for specific
purpose and dedicated function they are usually built as a reactive mechanism such
that their functioning is triggered by external response or feedback
5 Highly reliable Many embedded systems are deployed in severely hostile
environment where common machines or instruments computers would usually failto
operate Yet embedded systems in such conditions operate without any problems
Additionally these systems often reside in machines that are expected to run
continuously for years without errors and in some cases recover on its own if an error
occurs
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
70
For using embedded system programming you have to be much more aware of the
resources used in embedded systems programming than you have to in ―ordinary
programs
Time
Space
Communication channels
Files
Flash memory
ROM (Read-Only Memory)
In order to catch up with international trends in embedded systems industry and
institutions both have to do some work on their part
1 Mature electronic prototyping methods and systems need to be established so that
ideas could be validated faster and products would come well in time in the market
2 Ecosystem for electronic manufacturing esp low level hardware support as well as
high level product development needs to be augmented Since there is sheer lack of
such an ecosystem it not only poses challenges to industries but also to institutions in
terms of futuristic research and studies
3 Work towards innovations ndash not only in terms of technology but also in developing
new products and uses New generation engineers are coming up with many new and
novel ideas in this field however lack of end-to-end support is becoming key
impediment to lead those ideas towards logical and fruitful implementations
4 Nurture industry specific and industry ready talent While industry predictions are
stating numbers that could be tripled in coming few years lack of industry ready
talent is going to be the biggest hurdle Presently embedded system industry employs
approximately 60000 engineers across the country This high domestic demand
provides a strong argument for key stakeholders to drive the evolution of this
industry
5 To start the work towards applied research amp developments is a must Many of our
institutions are involved in research in embedded systemslsquo domain and have quality
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
71
ideas or suggestions However majority of the work involves only the study of
existing technology or have just a theoretical analytical outlook for the suggestion
42 FUTURE SCOPE OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM
The digital revolution now has reached to a stage where we cannot conduct our
normal modern daily lives without this technology Indeed it is reasonable to say that
everyone already owns at least one piece of equipment which contains a processor
whether it is a phone a television an automatic washing machine an MP3 player
microwave oven or anything such
The colossal growth of processing and controlling power in small packages has
fuelled this digital revolution by boon of embedded systems Embedded systems are
basically computer based control systems designed to perform specifically dedicated
functions within a set of larger system These are fixed or embedded as a part of the
complete bigger system hence the name ndash Embedded Systems
Development of embedded systems began in early 1960s and since then it has grown
exponentially in terms of power as well as functionality Apollo Guidance Computer
is one of the classic examples of first modern embedded systems developed at that
time Due to large scale proliferation of integrated chips and other related parts costs
of such systems have also come down drastically
Today these systems span across many aspects of our daily life ranging from
consumer electronics devices to medical equipments telecom instruments
automobiles and many others A staggering 11 billion processors were used in
embedded systems during 2007 and are rising annually Embedded systems have been
touching and changing modern lives like never before
An embedded system is a combination of computer hardware software and additional
mechanical or other technical components Most of the embedded systems also need
to meet real-time computing requirements Embedded system development in India
started around early 2000 The market reached approximately $5 billion by 2009 and
now has the potential to triple in size by 2015According to recently released
NASSCOM report the total addressable embedded system RampD global opportunity is
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
72
expected to reach approx $89 billion by 2015 where India alone could contribute
approx $15 billion in size This means that Indian technology firms and engineering
designers will have to drive actual product innovation and move towards product
ownership Presently many Indian companies provide high level software designs and
board level designs in a few cases Not much work is carried out in terms of
application design engineering hardware design and innovation towards customized
product development This lack of domain expertise in industry is basic impediment
for future growth Leveraging and growing in these areas can help Indian industry to
have significant improvement in embedded systems space and a few companies
already have started working towards this goal
421 OPPORTUNITIES
Two core parts of any embedded systems are its hardware and firmware or software
inside the core processing unit However many hardware platforms have reached
their configuration potential and are saturated in terms of adding new things that
cannot be added using firmware Additionally at the advent of open source hardware
platforms and quick prototyping and building blocks of hardware systems not much
differentiation can be made by just the hardware system This means software or
firmware is now a key differentiator since any new feature or specification can be
easily tackled or added using software changes Clearly now the software has to play
critical role of differentiation innovation and future enhancements in embedded
systems The ratio of contribution by firmware and hardware which was 30-70 (30
firmware amp 70 hardware) earlier has now become almost 50-50 and is expected to
grow further as hardware reaches its saturation in due course However as far as
Indian scenario is concerned our industry still lacks expertise in main domains such
as customized designs ICs new product designs base level manufacturing etc Most
of the products produced or supported in India are conceived in other countries and
only get produced supported and serviced here This poses future threat in terms of
overall healthy growth of embedded sector if not taken care of soon
While there are so many alluring opportunities in this field question is ndash how can we
benefit from this If you are an individual from engineering background ndash there is
clear cut opportunity for becoming an embedded systemslsquo engineer whether it is in
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills
73
the field of firmware system integration hardware designs or anything such
However it must be understood that on this fast track field industry is expecting
work-ready candidates This means candidates should have prior knowledge of this
field or should have a very steep learning curve to cope up with current trends For
institutions while companies are expecting industry ready candidates institutions
need to catch up with the speed by better alignment with industry standards and
forming industry-institution partnerships wherever possible Additionally since there
is greater scope for new researches designs amp innovations most of the research work
can be very well guided towards this trend where industry can support in getting
ideas into reality and on practical application level Looking from industry point of
view companies are aware of the opportunities as well as challenges that are posed
with it Creating a better ecosystem where each of the stakeholder and participant can
perform better and achieve a common goal of growth is the keyThe important point
here is although we have heaps of ideas and suggestions coming by the way of
research and developments practical application is overlooked in most of the cases
And this perhaps is a silent impediment in growth of this sector in IndiaAt this
gateway of the exploding market potential in embedded systems there is a demand
for intense unbiased and thorough education for our design engineers If embedded
systems are to become a serious discipline which should contribute to the progression
of the Indian economy and global demand in general it is imperative that our proven
expertise in IT software should play a crucial role in developing talent with the
required skills